JAN-701B-901B Instruction Manual PDF

JAN-701B/901B
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL
http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department

Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420
Facsimile :
tmsc@jrc.co.jp
e-mail :
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile :
+31-20-658-0755
e-mail :
service@jrceurope.com
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile :
+1-206-654-7030
e-mail :
marineservice@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056D
01ETM
DEC. 2012 Edition 6
ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JRC
Printed in Japan
Cautions for High Voltage

High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally
harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very
dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service,
inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant
deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts
could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand
into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is
strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge
with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you
put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another
important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of
using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of
electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the
burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.
Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid
immediately.
Method of First-Aid Treatment

Precautions for First-Aid Treatments
Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.
(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a

Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.
Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

(1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand..
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial
respiration.
(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your

mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose.
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
.
(3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.
Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No

Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard,
the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue
this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand
over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you
cant press to the extent the patients ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to
the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed about 2 cm (Repeat this
about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times and
then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. If two
first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 15 times,
and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this
sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
method).
Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are
restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the
patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or
her warm while watching him or her carefully.
Fig.2 Cardiac massage
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701B/901B ECDIS/Conning Display.
This equipment consists of ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information
System) and Conning Display.
This ECDIS meets the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime
Organization) and the IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to
improve safety, reduce fuel combustion, reduce voyage time and automate voyages.
For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly
before use.
Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701B)/1,920,000 (JAN-901B) or more TFTs
(Thin Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is
brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent
characteristic of the TFT display technology.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.
Before Operation
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are
shown on this equipment so that you can operate them safely and
correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons
and any damage to your property during operation. Such
indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in
danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is
neglected and this equipment is not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this
indication is neglected and this equipment is not operated
correctly.
Examples of pictorial indication

The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed content of CAUTION (Electric Shock in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
The
mark represents prohibition.
Detailed content of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in

Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The mark represents instruction.
Detailed content of the instruction (Disconnect the power plug in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
vi
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation
Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.
Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.
Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction
may occur.
In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact
our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an
electric shock or a malfunction.
In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from
an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one,
and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position Shift is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.
vii
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you
find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets
in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15
minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic sailing,
be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN]
key ).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.
Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.
After changing the setting, execute to exit Navigation & Planning.
Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on
their
and
terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
viii
Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures
above 55C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.
Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.
This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

If no backup measures are taken, such as using another EDIS unit for
confirmation, be sure to use official marine charts together with this
equipment to make any navigational decision.
This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against
such information from other sources.
Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
ix
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the
power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or a
malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).Use of
routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Do not turn off the power during Backup / Restore.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.
In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature, do
pre-heat less than 30 minutes.
Recover the system with [Recovery Boot CD] after reading an explanation well,
and having understood the function of [Recovery Boot CD] enough.
Dont continue the recovery as leave disk structure abnormal. Otherwise a
malfunction may occur.
This equipment is the system which is totally different from ECDIS
JAN701B/901B. Dont recover the system by a tool except attached [Recovery
Boot CD]. Otherwise a trouble and a malfunction may occur.
Use the Recovery Boot CD which is attached each device.
When using the Recovery Boot CD which is attached other device, it might
cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
The judgement of formal or informal about chart is depend on the
Administration organization of the flag state. About the offically of the chart,
please contact the Administration organization.
xi
Equipment Appearance
Stand-alone type (JAN-701B)
xii
Stand-alone type (JAN-901B)
xiii
Glossary
AIS
: Automatic Identification System
ARCS
: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.
ARPA
: Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.
AUTO SAIL
: The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as

automatic sailing.
Base CD
: Chart CD containing a complete chart data.
Cell Permit
: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,

PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of
Japan Coast Guard.
Chart Portfolio
: Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.
C-MAP Ed.3
: C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP
: Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.
CTS
: Course to steer. Heading command.
COG
: Course Over the Ground
Data Server
: Organization providing S-63 chart.
Display
: Screen displayed on the LCD.
DIST
: Distance
DR
: Dead Reckoning
EBL
: Electronic Bearing Lines
ECDIS
: Electronic Chart Display and Information System
ENC
: Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.
ETA
: Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD
: Estimated Time of Departure
F.ETA
: Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.
xiv
GC
: Great Circle
HDG
: Ships heading
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.
Publisher of ENC.
Import (for Chart Portfolio)
: A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on

ECDIS.
Leg
: Line between two consecutive waypoints
LMT
: Local Mean Time
LON
: Longitude
Primary
: Main positioning sensor.
PRIMAR STAVANGER
: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.
Range
: An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.
RL
: Rhumb Line
Rubber band
: Border that indicates the selected range.
S-57
: IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.
S-63
: IHO Data Protection Scheme
SA Certificate file
: An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/
update of S-63 chart.
Scale
: The display scale.
SENC
: System Electronic Navigational Chart
Ship-avoiding operation
: To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,

regardless of the scheduled route.
SOG
: Speed Over the Ground
Spot depth
: Numeric representation of depth.
TCS
: Track Control Systems
UKHO
: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
xv
Update (for Chart Portfolio)
: A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the

imported chart.
Update CD
: Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.
USER CODE
: A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63

charts.
UTC
: Universal Time, Coordinated
VRM
: Variable Range Markers
WOL
: Wheel Over Line
WOP
: Wheel Over Point
WPT
: Waypoint
WPT-WPT
: The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.
XTD
: Cross Track Distance
XTL
: Cross Track Limit
xvi
Contents
PREFACE ................................................................................................................................................... v
Before Operation ............................................................................................................................. vi
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ....................................................................................... vii
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... xiv
1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Features ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Components............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.4 Construction ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 System Configuration........................................................................................................................................................1-12
2 Names and Functions ...........................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Function of Operation Panel and LCD brilliance control ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)..................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel ............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information .....................................................................................2-8
2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status .................................................................2-10
2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status ........................................................................................2-12
2.2.1.4 The setting of the route .................................................................................2-12
2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship..........................................................2-13
2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP ............................................................2-15
2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS.......................................................................2-16
2.2.1.8 Tools Panel....................................................................................................2-17
2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel .................................................................................2-18
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar .........................................................................................................2-19
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS ....................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Menu Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu ............................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu..................................................................................3-5
3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu.........................................................................3-8
3.1.2 Various Panels ........................................................................................................3-10
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.........................................................................3-12
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard ............................................................................3-12
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard ......................................................................3-13
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input .............................................................................................3-14
3.1.3.4 Character Input .............................................................................................3-16
3.2 General Flowchart ..............................................................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.1 General Flowchart ...................................................................................................3-17
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing................................................................................................3-18
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation..................................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]).............................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu .....................................................................................3-21
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only).................................................3-22
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation .............................................................................................3-24
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ..........................................................3-24

3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])............................................................3-28
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) ............................................................3-30
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])..................................................................3-37
3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display .......................................................................................3-40
3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF ................................................................................3-40
3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list .................................................................................3-41
3.3.9.3 Target Track ..................................................................................................3-46
3.3.9.4 File operation ................................................................................................3-49
3.3.9.5 Display Received Message...........................................................................3-50
3.3.9.6 AIS sentence .................................................................................................3-50
3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets .......................................................3-50
3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target .....................................................................3-52
3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard) .........................................................................................3-53
3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive and DVD .........................................3-55
3.4 Shifting the Chart ...............................................................................................................................................................3-56

3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ..............................................................3-56
3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor.................................................................3-57
3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor..................................................................3-58
3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List].............................................................................3-58
3.4.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position ............................................................3-59
3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)................................................................................................3-60
3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................3-60
3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................................................................3-61
3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...............................................................3-62
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).................................................................3-63
3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)...........................................................................................3-64
3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode ..................................................................................................................................3-66
3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode............................................................................................3-69
3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode............................................................................................3-69
3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode............................................................................................3-70
3.8 My Port List..........................................................................................................................................................................3-71
3.8.1 Adding to My Port List .............................................................................................3-71
3.8.2 Deleting My Port List ...............................................................................................3-72
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)...........................................................................................................................3-73
3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)........................................................................................................3-74
3.10.1 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)...........................................................3-74
3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) .......................................................3-75
3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)...................................................................3-76
3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) ..................................................................3-77
3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ......................................................3-78
3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)....................................................3-78
3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only) ...........................................................3-79
3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only) .....................................3-80
3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) ..............................................................................3-81
3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View)................................................................3-85
3.11.1 Multi View Screen..................................................................................................3-86
3.11.2 Selecting an Area ..................................................................................................3-87

3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) .....................................................3-88
3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT ......................................................................................................................................3-89

3.12.1 Selecting Route and To WPT Using the Display Panel.........................................3-89
3.12.2 Distance Measurement .........................................................................................3-91
3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm......................................................................................................3-94
3.13 Displaying a User Map ....................................................................................................................................................3-95
3.14 Reading Out Information on the Object ..................................................................................................................3-96
3.15 Displaying the AIO ...........................................................................................................................................................3-99
3.16 Operating EBL/VRM .................................................................................................................................................... 3-101
3.16.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel ................................................3-101
3.16.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu....................................................3-106
3.16.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option..................................................................3-106
3.16.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2) ....................................3-108
3.16.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2) ..........................................................3-109
3.16.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2) ........................................................3-109
3.16.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM Move Origin1 (Move Origin2) .................................3-110
3.16.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)........................................3-110
3.16.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2) .............................................................. 3-111
3.16.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)............................................................ 3-111
3.16.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel.....................................................3-112
3.16.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel .......................................3-113
3.16.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel......................................3-113
3.16.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM ......................................................3-114
3.16.4 Marker Setting .....................................................................................................3-115
3.17 Running Fix ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-116
3.18 Monitoring Dragging Anchor...................................................................................................................................... 3-117
3.19 User-Marking/Highlighting ......................................................................................................................................... 3-119
3.19.1 Marking the Event Mark ......................................................................................3-119
3.19.2 Marking the Information Mark .............................................................................3-121
3.19.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ...........................................................................3-122
3.19.4 Highlight ..............................................................................................................3-123
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
EBL Maneuver ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-125

Cross Bearing ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-127
Inputting Clearing Lines .............................................................................................................................................. 3-129
LOP(Line Of Position) ................................................................................................................................................. 3-130
Acquisition Zone ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-138
Multi Window.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.25.1 Using the Analog Meter.......................................................................................3-140
3.25.2 Other Multi Window display.................................................................................3-141
3.26 Cursor Auto Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.27 Logbook............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-145
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook.......................................................................................3-145
3.27.2 Logbook Setting ..................................................................................................3-152
3.28 Own Ships Setting...................................................................................................................................................... 3-154
3.28.1 Own Ship Symbol................................................................................................3-155
3.28.2 Vector Display at POSN1 ....................................................................................3-156
3.28.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector ...............................................................3-157

3.28.4 Track and Time Label Display .............................................................................3-159
3.28.5 Heading Line and Beam Line..............................................................................3-160
3.29 Chart Setting................................................................................................................................................................... 3-161

3.29.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS .......................................................................3-161
3.29.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab ................................................................3-162
3.29.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab..............................................................................3-172
3.29.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab..............................................................................3-179
3.29.2 Other Chart Setting .............................................................................................3-180
3.29.3 Save Chart Setting ..............................................................................................3-181
3.29.4 Chart Setting List.................................................................................................3-182
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
Chart Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-183

Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart...................................................................................................................... 3-184
Graphical Index............................................................................................................................................................... 3-186
Date-dependant View.................................................................................................................................................. 3-188
Setting Radar Options................................................................................................................................................. 3-189
3.34.1 Setting of RADAR................................................................................................3-189
3.35 AIS/TT Setting............................................................................................................................................................... 3-190

3.35.1 AIS/Target Track Setting......................................................................................3-190
3.35.2 Association Setting ..............................................................................................3-195
3.36 Shifting Own Ship Position ........................................................................................................................................ 3-196
3.36.1 Shifting Using the Cursor ....................................................................................3-198
3.36.2 Shifting by Entering the Position .........................................................................3-199
3.36.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value...................................................................3-199
3.36.4 Canceling the Ship Offset....................................................................................3-199
3.37 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer)............................................................................................ 3-200
3.38 Saving the Screen......................................................................................................................................................... 3-201
3.39 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the navigation & Planning).................................................................... 3-201
4 Route Planning......................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Route Planning....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options .........................................................................................4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor .....................................................................4-8
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode..........................................................................................4-8
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ...............................................4-9
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor ............................................................4-14
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) .......................................................4-16
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) .................................................4-28
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files....................................................................................4-29
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files....................................................................................4-30
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor ...............................................................4-32
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode ...................................................................................4-32
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor) ..............................................4-33
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ...................................................4-37
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)..................................................4-39
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor).....................................................4-51
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files....................................................................................4-52
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files....................................................................................4-53
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials...............................................4-54
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route ..........................................................................................................................................4-57

4.2.1 Operation Flowchart ................................................................................................4-57
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.........................................................................................4-58
5 Chart Editing .........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Chart Edit Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions .......................................................................................................5-8
5.3 User Map Editor Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit ...............................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map ..........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map.............................................................................5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map .......................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps.......................................................................................5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps.....................................................................................5-17
5.3.2.5 User Map Setting ..........................................................................................5-18
5.4 Manual Update Operation................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update ...........................................................................................5-19
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects...........................................................5-20
5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting .................................................................................5-23
5.5 Entering Objects .................................................................................................................................................................5-24
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types............................................................................................5-26
5.5.2 Entering Objects......................................................................................................5-27
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)...................................5-40
6 Automatic Sailing...................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Automatic Sailing System ................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route ..........................................................6-2
6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route...............................................................6-3
6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm.........................................................................6-4
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing .......................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT.............................................................................6-8
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route ...................................................................6-9
6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route .....................................................................6-10
6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing ...........................................................................6-11
6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing..................................................................................6-12
7 Tools and Setting/ Serviceman Menu ...................................................................................................7-1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
File Manager............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2

System Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
Operating Time ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Color Test (ARCS Only) .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Sensor 7-8
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position .................................................................7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting..........................................................................................................7-9
7.5.3 Speed Setting ..........................................................................................................7-10
7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting........................................................................................7-10
7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting ..............................................................................7-11
7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting............................................................................................................................................7-12

7.7 Setting the User Key.........................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.8 Setting Date/Time .............................................................................................................................................................7-14
7.9 Clear Voyage Distance .....................................................................................................................................................7-15
7.10 Setting the Alarm Options............................................................................................................................................7-16
7.11 Radar Process Setting ...................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.12 Language..............................................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.13 Code Input...........................................................................................................................................................................7-19
7.14 Analog Correct Value .....................................................................................................................................................7-20
7.15 Own ships Parameter Setting ...................................................................................................................................7-21
7.15.1 Ships Parameter...................................................................................................7-21
7.15.2 CCRP Setting ........................................................................................................7-22
7.16 Line Monitor........................................................................................................................................................................7-23
7.17 Adjust Radar Bearing, Range and Antenna Height..............................................................................................7-24
7.18 Installation Information...................................................................................................................................................7-26
7.19 TCS Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................7-27
7.20 Radar Initial Setup............................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.21 Data Backup/Restore.....................................................................................................................................................7-29
7.21.1 How to backup the data.........................................................................................7-30
7.21.2 How to restore the data .........................................................................................7-31
8 Playback................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
9 Reference..............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Alarm Function....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart .............................................................................9-7
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ...................................................................9-9
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart .....................................................................9-10
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System...............................................................................................................................9-16
9.4 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations.....................................................................................................9-17
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export ........................................................................................9-22
9.5.1 File Types ................................................................................................................9-22
9.5.2 File Names ..............................................................................................................9-22
9.5.3 CSV File Data Structure ..........................................................................................9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files ....................................................................................................9-23
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files ............................................................................................9-28
9.5.3.3 Logbook File..................................................................................................9-39
9.6 Display Symbols ..................................................................................................................................................................9-43
9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS .............................................................................................................................9-66
10 Maintenance and Inspection .............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Confirming Alarm ..............................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57) ..............................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale.............................................................................................................10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables .................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input .....................................................................................................10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance Menu ....................................................10-8
10.5.2 Disk Information ..................................................................................................10-10
10.5.2.1 Drive Information.......................................................................................10-10
10.5.2.2 File Information .........................................................................................10-11
10.5.3 Setting HDD organization....................................................................................10-12
10.5.4 Hardware Key Information ..................................................................................10-13
10.5.5 CD Cleaner..........................................................................................................10-14
10.6 Recovery by Image File............................................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in case of old processing unit (NCM-860) .....................10-17
10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in case of new processing unit (NCM-860A).................10-19
10.7 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-21
11 Operation of Multi Window ................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Operation of Multi Window............................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Selecting Multi Window .........................................................................................11-2
11.2 Configuration for Each Graph......................................................................................................................................11-4
11.2.1 Course BarTab...............................................................................................11-5
11.2.2 ClimateTab.....................................................................................................11-5
11.2.3 Ship (Voyage)Tab ..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.4 Ship(Docking)Tab ..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.5 Current/WindTab............................................................................................11-7
11.2.6 Depth GraphTab ............................................................................................11-7
11.2.7 Engine GraphTab...........................................................................................11-8
11.2.8 Gyro/RudderTab ............................................................................................11-8
11.2.9 DraftTab .........................................................................................................11-9
11.2.10 CurrentTab...................................................................................................11-9
11.2.11 Menu ControlTab .......................................................................................11-10
12 Display and View of Multi Window ....................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Display of Each Information .........................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.1 Display of Navigation Information .........................................................................12-2
12.1.1.1 Rearranging Blocks.....................................................................................12-3
12.1.1.2 Changing Block Size...................................................................................12-3
12.2 View of Each Information ..............................................................................................................................................12-4
12.2.1 View of Navigation Information .............................................................................12-4
13 After-Sales Service............................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Maintenance Service.......................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts ..............................................................................................................................13-2
13.3 When Asking for Service ...............................................................................................................................................13-2
13.4 Checks and Inspection ...................................................................................................................................................13-2
14 Disposal ............................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Disposal of the Product.................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Disposal of Used Batteries...........................................................................................................................................14-2
14.3 Disposal of LCD Module ................................................................................................................................................14-2
15 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1 Bridge Display Terminal .................................................................................................................................................15-2
Index ...........................................................................................................................................................1
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE......................4

Repair Request Form..................................................................................................................................7
Overview
1-1
1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System)
functions conforming to the ECDIS Performance Standards adopted in IMO Resolution MSC.232(82),
and also meets IMO Resolutions MSC.191(79) and A694(17). Consequently, this equipment can become
the core of an integrated navigation system (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports
one-man bridge operation.
Safe sailing
Energy-saved sailing
ECDIS functions:
ECDIS
Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
The customers are recommended to monitor information about updated ECDIS software
version visiting to JRC website
(http://www.jrc.co.jp/eng/product/marine/application/ecdis_version.html).
Availability of S-57 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.3, and ARCS as chart databases
Own ships track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS)
TT target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional
radar overlay kit)
True/Relative motion display
North-up/Course-up display
Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time
Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ships speed
Display symbols used to present chart information are presented in accordance with S-52 and its
appendices.
Display specifications
Size: 19-inch color LCD (JAN-701B)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and
dusk Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO.
Navigation Planning
Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes
Automatic sailing functions

Route tracking
Course change
1 Overview
1-2
Alarm functions
Safety depth crossing alarm
Dangerous areas crossing alarm
Waypoint arrival alarm
ECDIS
XTD alarm
Logging functions
Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
Own ships playback using logged data
1-3
1 Overview
1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:
ECDIS functions:
Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas
and the guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the
connected Navtex receiver
Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
Ease of user chart creation
Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
Creation of alternative route during voyage
Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
Playback function to check the voyage
S-57 update portfolio
1 Overview
1-4
1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.
ECDIS
Components
Name
Model
Quantity
Comment
Display Unit
Monitor Unit
(JAN-701B)
NCD-2095
(JAN-901B)
NCD-2096
(JAN-701B)
NWZ-173-E
(JAN-901B)
NWZ-170-E
Operation Unit
Main Unit
Included in the main unit
NCE-5163-E
Processing
(JAN-701B)
NCD-1444
Unit
(JAN-901B)
NCD-1445
Instruction Manual (Japanese)
7ZPNA4055D
Instruction Manual (English)
7ZPNA4056D
AOB Additional Kit
MPXP34119
Option
SRB Additional Kit
MPXP34118
Option
Radar Overlay Kit
MPXP34117
Option
Optional Mini Keyboard Kit
MPXP33223A
Canvas cover
(JAN-701B)
(JAN-901B)
MPOL30345A
(JAN-701B)
MPOL30350
Lightproof hood
Accessory
CD Cleaner
FD Cleaner
7ZZNA0426B
1-5
1
1
Option
Packing in 1box
1 Overview
1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.
Mass: Approx. 125 kg
Cable Inlet
Warning label
NCD-2095 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701B) (UNIT: mm)

1 Overview
1-6
ECDIS
Mass: Approx. 150kg
Cable Inlet
Warning label
NCD-2096 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901B) (UNIT: mm)
1-7
1 Overview
1 Overview
1-8
Flash-mount type
NCD-1444-T Processing Unit (UNIT: mm)
MASS:APPROX. 85kg
1-9
1 Overview
Flash-mount type
NWZ-173-ET 19 LCD Unit (UNIT: mm)
MASS:APPROX. 13.3kg
ECDIS
1 Overview
1-10
Flash-mount type
NWZ-170-ET 23.1 LCD UNIT (UNIT: mm)
MASS:APPROX. 25kg
ECDIS
MASS:APPROX. 3.5kg
NCE-5163-E Operation Panel
1-11
1 Overview
1.5 System Configuration

The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.
/ CONNING
1 Overview
1-12
Names
and
Functions
2-1
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.
2.1 Function of Operation Panel

and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each
part on the operation panel.
23
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
24
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel
2 Names and Functions
2-2
26
27
Table 2.1 Names and Functions

No.
Name
Function
POWER
Turns the power on.
PWR FAIL
Indicates the AC power supply error.

(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
PWR ACK
Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.

(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
VIDEO*1
Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.
5
6
RAIN
*1
Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
*1
SEA
Suppresses sea clutter.
*1
GAIN
RANGE
Adjusts receiver gain.
TURN
*2
10
ALARM ACK
Press to acknowledge an alarm.
11
ROUTE PLAN
Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).
12
DAY/NIGHT
Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.
13
PANEL
Dims the operation panel in five steps.
Range up.
Range down.
Starts turning.
*1
14
RADAR
15
AUTO SAIL*2
Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.

Starts/Stops auto sail.
16
MENU
Display Menu title bar.
17
AIS/TT
Selects AIS/TT display.
18
HOME
Returns the own ships position into the display.
19
MOB
MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.

When hold down for more than three seconds, MOB panel is closed.
20
USER
21
OPTION 1
22
OPTION 2
One of the following user-registered functions is executed:

(See 7.7 Setting the User Key.)
- Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ships option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Displaying the port name list
- Changing the ARCSs active panel
- Loading ARCSs low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
- Saving Screen
- Saving chart option setting
- Displaying chart option setting list
- Changing S-57/C-MAP chart display BASE temporarily
- PreSet Multi Window
23
EBL1/EBL2
Turns the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) ON/OFF, and operates the
EBL.
24
VRM1/VRM2
Turns the VRM (Variable Range Marker) ON/OFF, and operates the
VRM.
2-3
ECDIS
Table 2.1 Names and FunctionsContinued

No.
Name
Function
25
TRACK BALL
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position
designation, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu
designation, etc.
26
LEFT BUTTON
Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.

Pressing the left button is written as left-click in this book.
27
RIGHT BUTTON
Used for confirming alarms.

Pressing the right button is written as right-click in this book.
*1: Effective only when optional radar overlay kit is installed.

*2: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.
(2) LCD brilliance control

The screens brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screens brightness will be adjusted to an optimal
condition automatically.
JAN-701B
Brilliance control
JAN-901B
Brilliance control
Note:
For JAN-901B, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screens brightness to an
optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.
2-4
2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)

The functions of the display of the ECDIS unit are described here.
The screen consists of three areas, the chart display area, TCS bar and display panel (information
display area). The menu title bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode.
Menu title bar
North arrow mark
Chart Display area
TCS bar
Display panel
Chart Display Area:

The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS
charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
Your ships symbol and vector at the primary position
Your ships symbol and vector at the secondary position
Head line
Primary position track and time label
Secondary position track
EBL/VRM markers
RADAR echo
Other ship symbols, vectors and ships track (when AIS/TT is installed)
Etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.
Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that
will be frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.
Menu Title Bar:

When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.
2-5
ECDIS
TCS Bar:
Information bar for Auto Sail. Most of the items in the TCS bar display a value by choosing route on the
Display Panel.
To WPT: Number of To WPT

Next WPT: Next number of To WPT
TTG:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the To WPT
ETA:
Speed to arrive at the to WPT by the planned time
XTD:
XTD (Cross Track Distance)
XTL:
XTL (Cross Track Limit)
In XTD and XTL, displayed side of P (Port side) and S (Starboard side).
NM/m:
Selecting units of distance. This setting is applied to XTD and XTL.
CRS:
Bearing from To WPT to Next WPT
Alarms:
The number of alarm occurring now
Warnings: The number of warning occurring now
2-6
2.2.1 Display Panel

The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or
ARCS. The following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS
ECDIS
Own Ship Information; See 2.2.1.1.
The other ship displaying status; See 2.2.1.2.

Auto sailing status. See 2.2.1.3.
The setting of a route and the display of the WPT

information; See 2.2.1.4
The other information on the own ship; See 2.2.1.5
Chart information: The item depends on ARCS

chart and other chart.
ARCS Chart: See 2.2.1.7
S-57/C-MAP: See 2.2.1.6
Tools and Brilliance Setting; It changes a display at

the arrow button.
Tools: See 2.2.1.8
Brilliance: See 2.2.1.9
The alarm which occurs at present can be
confirmed.
Besides, you can do acknowledge of the alarm and
display of the alarm list. See 3.3.7
Bearing and distance from cursor
to own ship.
The position of cursor.

Latitude / Longitude
2-7
2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information

1)
The Basic Information
Chosen CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point):

CCRP can be set from four (CCRP1-CCRP4). The
CCRP setting can be changed in menu [Serviceman] [Installation] - [CCRP Setting].
The picture freeze indicator:

This indicator is animating while the
screen-display is working normally.
Heading by HDG Sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.
Speed Through the Water by STW sensor:
are displayed.
Course Over the Ground and Speed Over the
Ground by primary sensor:
are displayed.
CCRP position by primary position sensor:
When the offset values are entered, the
background color is colored in sky blue.
Primary sensor information: It is fixing on "POSN1".

The name of the primary sensor is displayed.
Geodetic system name: It is fixing on "WGS-84".
If the geodetic system displays a chart except "WGS-84" at the
ARCS chart, the background changes to the sky blue.
It displays a current time.
By pushing the UTC/LMT button, the interval of UTC-LMT can be changed.
In case of UTC display, a time zone is displayed as + 00:00.
In case of LMT, a set value is displayed in the time zone.
The following item can be changed setting in menu [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] [(3)Date/Time
Setting]
Date / Time / Time Zone (if manual setting)
2-8
Note:
The following item can change setting in menu [Main]-[Sensor].
Heading Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
STW Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
POSN1 (Primary sensor): It chooses from the connected equipment or Dead Reckoning.
POSN2: It isn't reflected in the display panel. POSN2 can set like POSN1, or unused.
Date and Time Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
Time Zone Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
The following table shows the relation of the sensor name of the display panel to the sensor setting
by POSN1.
POSN1 Sensor
Input data
Setting
2)
Display name on
Display name on
COG and SOG
position
DGPS1
GPS
(GPS)
GPS1
DGPS1
Differential GPS
(GPS)
DGPS1
DGPS2
GPS
(GPS)
GPS2
DGPS2
Differential GPS
(GPS)
DGPS2
GPS-Compass
GPS-Compass
(GPS)
GPS-C
Loran-C
Loran-C
(Loran)
LORAN-C
DR
(Dead Reckoning)
(DR)
DR
CTS / Vector Time / Water Depth
CTS (Course to Steer):

It is displayed direction azimuth to be sending to Auto Sailing system.
It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.
Vector time:
It is displaying time for vector length; Ground-referenced
velocity and Water-referenced velocity.
Vector time can be set on menu [(4)Own Ship/Track] [(0)Setting].
Depth:
It displays water depth and the standard position from the Depth sensor.
The kind of the standard position: Transducer, Surface, Keel.
2-9
ECDIS
2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status

In case of setting to display on the chart about the other ship information, an information name is displayed
in this column.
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2 : [MENU]-[(7)Main] [(9)Radar Overlay]- [(1)Radar 1] or[(2)Radar 2]
TT1 (Target Track 1) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(1)TT1] or [(4)All]
TT2 (Target Track 2) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(2)TT2] or [(4)All]
AIS (Automatic Identification System) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(3)AIS] or [(4)All]
Association Setting:
When Association Setting is valid, AIS and TT targets

which are in same position are integrated..
Association Setting can change validity by clicking this

item. While Association Setting is valid, the background
color of this item changes.
It does the detailed setting of Association Setting with
menu [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(0)Association Setting]..
If AIS is not use, Association Setting is disappeared.
Filter Setting:
It changes filter setting by AIS.
The shape of the filter has two kinds of "Ring" and "Sector". While Filter Setting is valid, the background
color of this item changes.. The setting can be changed to each shape. When both filters are invalid,
AIS filter is not function.
The feature of the filter includes two kinds of [Priority]displaying only within the limits) ,[Display](having
priority of display within the limits). It does the change of this setting and the other detailed setting with
menu [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(0)AIS/TT Setting].
2-10
Other Ship Information displaying procedure:

RADAR1 or RADAR2
When selecting [MENU][(7) Main][(9) Radar Overlay][(1)Radar 1], it is displayed with [RADAR1].
When selecting [MENU][(7) Main][(9) Radar Overlay][(2)Radar 2], it is displayed with [RADAR2]..
It becomes blank when making the check of [Radar Overlay] invalid.
[RADAR1] or [RADAR2] is as displayed even if it does an off center in the radar overlay and it makes
Radar Overlay off.
TT1 (Target Track 1)
Following is displayed by "TT1" input data when selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
TT1(REL)
TT1(GND)
TT1(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
When using ground-speed stability of Internal TT.
[TT1-INT(GND) ]is displayed in box, and box is blank displayed.
When using through-the-water-speed of Internal TT.
[TT1-INT(SEA) is displayed in box, and box is blank displayed.
TT2 (Target Track 2)
Following is displayed by "TT2" input data when selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
TT2(REL)
TT2(GND)
TT2(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
AIS
"AIS" is displayed when selecting [MENU][(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].
2-11
ECDIS
2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status

The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:
Displays the autopilot steering mode.
See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various steering modes.
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing
MAN: Manual turning mode
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing

KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg
DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation
AUTO: Auto turning mode
NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing

(The route has not been loaded, or a POS1, Gyro, Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
TCS: TCS type Auto Sailing
Note:
To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.
2.2.1.4 The setting of the route

The setting of a route and the display of the WPT information
Route name being selected (UNLOAD appears if nothing is selected.

Drop-down list shows all route names.)
When clicking Route combo box, a drop down list of route files is displayed.
First line: File name
Second line: Comment of route file
Next waypoint being selected
(Drop-down list shows the selectable waypoints manually.)
When starting Auto Sail, the combo box can not be selected
from except WPT which is heading at current.
Bearing and Distance from the ship to the To WPT
2-12
2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship

CALC: (Actual Speed)
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)
Distance from the ship to the to destined waypoint
ECDIS
Actual Speed
Estimated Time of Arrival at the to destined waypoint
Speed to arrive at the to destined waypoint by the planned time
Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.
CALC: (Input ETA to calculation Average Speed)

Displays speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated
time of arrival
Setting of estimated time of arrival
CALC: (Input Average Speed to calculation ETA)
Setting of speed
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the destination No.
Drift:
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG

and HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG
and HDG vectors.
Route:
Estimated Time of Arrival at the final waypoint
Total sum of distance between the own ship and the starting WPT000.
2-13
WPT:
Name of displayed WPT

Latitude of displayed WPT
Longitude of displayed WPT
Select from To / Next

To: Displays To WPT
Next: Displays Next to To WPT
Pair:
[Pair] tab isn't displayed when not using TCS type Auto Pilot.
Plan course, actual heading azimuth of own ship
are displayed.
Plan vessel speed, actual through the

water speed of own ship are displayed.
Plan turn course radius, order turn course
radius is displayed.
2-14
2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP

When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.
When left-clicked, MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.
When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list.
Selected port name position will be displayed on the chart.
ECDIS
The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.

SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level
selectable with the drop down list button.
Base:
Shows basic information such as geographic area.
(This is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
Standard: Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
Other:
Shows all information.
!:
Shows all objects that belong to standard information.
Scale of the chart being displayed
(Drop-down list shows all available scales.)
Range of the chart being displayed
(Drop-down list shows all available ranges).
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True:
Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches the
predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic objects
move instead.
Free:
Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.
Azmuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)

North Up:
The chart always orients north.
Course Up: Your ships heading faces up on the screen.
(The chart rotates. After, the screen keeps the set direction.)
Rotation:
You can rotate the chart by the specified amount using the degree
specifying box on this panel.
WPT Up:
The direction from ship to To WPT always faces up on the screen.

(The chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)
Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth Rotation.

Home: Displays your ship on the screen.
Zoom In: You can magnify the range.
Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.
Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber band.
2-15
2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS
Note:
Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME] buttons
is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.
Displays the geodetic system of the chart.
Displays the original scale of the chart.

Scale Of the chart being displayed
Range of the chart being displayed
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the geographic
objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.
Chart offset values
Opens the Select Chart panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want.
2-16
2.2.1.8 Tools Panel

Refer to 3.15.3
Units of distance switch button
Azimuth of EBL switch button
When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
T: True North mode
[NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] ->
R: Bearing Reference mode
Tool area switch button

Displaying position of cross point
on EBL1 and VRM1
on EBL2 and VRM2
Base point mode switch button
[Blank]: CCRP mode
D: Dropped point mode
Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 switch button
Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Inactive: Displaying OFF
Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 switch button
Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
EBL1/EBL2 edit mode switch button
Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
VRM1/VRM2 edit mode switch button
Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.
2-17
ECDIS
2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel

Refer to 3.3.5.
Tool area switch button

Day-Night level switch button
When left-click, display level is changed.
[DAY1]-> [DAY2]-> [DAY3]-> [DUSK]->
[NIGHT]-> [DUSK]-> [DAY3]
AIS/Tracked Target brightness switch button
Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.
Video brightness switch button (In using radar)
Changing 1 to 4 levels every Day-Night level.
Operation panel light brightness switch button

Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.
2-18
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar

When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens and you can access to various
menus.
ECDIS
The following shows the menu trees:

Table 2.2 Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) AIS/TT
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(1) TT1
3.3.9.1
(2) TT2
3.3.9.1
(3) AIS
3.3.9.1
(4) All
3.3.9.1
(5) Deactivate All AIS
3.3.9.7
(6) All List
3.3.9.2
(7) Select List
3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track
(1) Target Track Setting

(2) File Operation
(9) Own Ships AIS Data

(1) Message
(0) AIS Sentence
(3) Auto Sail
3.3.9.5
(2)Broadcast Message
3.3.9.5
(1) VDM
3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1
3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2
3.3.9.6
3.35.1
3.35.2
(1) Table Editor
4.1.2
(2) Graphic Editor
4.1.3
(2) Create Alternate Route
4.2
(3) Distance Measurement
3.12.2
(4) Use XTD Alarm
3.12.3
(0) Setting
6.3.2 / 6.3.3
(1) Start
6.3.4
(2) Stop
6.2
(0) Setting
(4) Ownship/Track
3.3.9.4
(1)Addressed Message
(0) Association Setting

(1) Route Planning
3.3.9.3
3.3.9.2
(0) AIS/TT Setting

(2) Route
Reference
(1) Adjust
3.36.1
(1) Cursor
3.36.2
(2) Enter Position
3.36.3
(3) Enter Offset
3.36.4
(4) Clear Offset
3.3.9.1
2-19
Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(4) Ownship/Track
(5) User Map
Submenu
(2) Anchor Watch
Submenu/Option
(1) Create Monitoring Circle
3.18
(2) Clear Monitoring Circle
3.18
(0) Setting
3.28
(1) Select User Map
3.13
(2) Unselect User Map
3.13
(3) User Map Editor

(6) Chart
Reference
(1) Marking/Highlighting
(2) Off Center

(3) User Setting
5.3
(1) Event Mark
3.19.1
(2) Information Mark
3.19.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark
3.19.3
(4) Highlight
3.19.4
(5) Delete Event Mark
3.19.1
(1) Enter Position
3.4.5
(2) Home
3.4.1
(1) Save My Port List
3.8.1
(2) My Port List
3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting
3.29.3
(4) Chart Setting List
3.29.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart
3.9
(5) Fix View
3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates
3.31
(7) Graphical Index
3.32
(8) Manual Update

(1) Multi View
(2) Chart Portfolio
5.4
(1) Single View
3.11.1
(2) Top Bottom
3.11.1
(3) Right Left
3.11.1
(4) Right Top View
3.11.1
(5) Left Top View
3.11.1
(6) Right Bottom View
3.11.1
(7) Left Bottom View
3.11.1
(8) Select Area
3.11.2
(9) Wide Range View
3.11.3
(1) Create
(2) Top Window
(3) Chart Abbreviation

(4) ARCS
(5) Setting
(7) Main
30
(1) Temporary and Preliminary
3.10.8
(2) Adjust Datum Offset
3.10.9
(3) Datum Transformation
3.10.9
(1) S-57/ C-MAP/ARCS
3.29.1
(2) Other Chart
3.29.2
(1) EBL Maneuver
3.20
/Remove EBL Maneuver

(2) Cross Bearing
(3) Create Clearing Line
3.21
(1) Not Less Than
3.22
(2) Not More Than
3.22
2-20

Main Menu
(7) Main
Submenu
(4) LOP
Submenu/Option
Reference
(1)Create Lop
3.23
(2)Delete All LOP
3.23
(5) Print
3.37
(6) Save Screen
3.38
(7) Logbook
3.27.1
(8) Multi Window
(9) Radar Overlay
(1) PreSet
3.25.2
(2) Analog Meter
3.25.1
(3) Climate
3.25.2
(4) Draft
3.25.2
(5) Current Wind
3.25.2
(6) Course Rudder Graph
3.25.2
(7) Course Bar
3.25.2
(8) Ship
3.25.2
(9) Engine Graph
3.25.2
(5) Wind Graph
3.25.2
(6) TEMP Graph Setting
3.25.2
(7) PreSet Save
3.25.2
(0) Option
3.25.2
(1) Radar1
3.3.8
(2) Radar2
3.3.8
(3) Range Ring
3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
3.3.8
(0) Setting
7.11
(1) Make AZ
3.24
(2) File Manager
7.1
(3) Test
(1) Alarm Log
3.3.7
(2) System Information
7.2
(3) Operating Time
7.3
(4) ARCS Color Test
7.4
7.5
(4) Sensor
7.13
(5) Code Input

(0) Setting
(1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6

(2) Option Key Setting
7.7
(3) Date/Time Setting
7.8
(4) Marker Setting
3.16.2.1
(5) Logbook Setting
3.27.2
(6) Voyage Distance Clear
7.9
(7) Display Panel Setting
3.25.1
(8) Alarm Setting
7.10
(9) Radar Process Setting
7.11
(1) Language
7.12
(0) Buzzer Volume
3.3.5
(0) INS Setting

3.39
(0) Exit
2-21
ECDIS

Main Menu
Submenu
(1) Serviceman
Submenu/Option
Reference
(1) Line Monitor
7.16
(2) Adjust
7.17
(3) Installation
(1) Installation Information
7.18
(2) CCRP Setting
7.15.2
(4) Ship's Parameter
7.15.1
(5) TCS Maintenance
7.19
(6) Radar Initial Setup
7.20
(7) Data Backup/Restore
(1) Backup
7.21.1
(2) Restore
7.21.2
(0) Exit Serviceman Menu
Context Menu
Main Menu
Submenu
Reference
Abort
3.1.1.3
Activate AIS
3.3.9.7
Deactivate AIS
3.3.9.7
TGT Data
3.3.9.7
Cancel TGT Data
3.3.9
TGT Property
3.3.9
S-57/C-MAP /ARCS Information
3.14
Other Information
3.14
Auto mode
3.26
Zoom Area
3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM
CCRP EBL/VRM
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.2
EBL1
3.16.2.3
EBL2
3.16.2.3
VRM1
3.16.2.4
VRM2
3.16.2.4
Move Origin1
3.16.2.5
Move Origin2
3.16.2.5
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.6
EBL1
3.16.2.7
EBL2
3.16.2.7
VRM1
3.16.2.8
VRM2
3.16.2.8
Running Fix / Remove Running Fix
3.17
High Resolution Area
3.10.6
Load Low Resolution
3.10.5
Select Chart Under Cursor
3.10.2
Change Active Panel
3.10.4
Note and Diagram
3.10.7
2-22
Basic
Operation
of ECDIS
3-1
Do not place any object on the operation panel.

Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as
[xxxx] in this book.
Example:
[RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
[MENU] button (on the display panel)
[(1) Cursor] (menu name)
(2)
Menu operation description:

The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
You will learn how to access to a menu later.
Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 Menu
Operation.
The flowchart described in 3.2 General Flowchart will give you general procedure for this
equipment.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
3-2
3.1 Menu Operation

To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here. Also,
major panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers and letters
are described.
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu
ECDIS
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball

Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball
(Moves the cursor.)
Left button
(Left-click)
Right button
(Right-click)
Trackball:
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the
screen for position designation, selection of buttons
on the display panel, menu designation, etc.
Left button:
Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart,
or selecting a button, menus and options on the
screen. Pressing the left button is written as
left-click in this book.
Right button (context menu selection button):
Used for displaying a context menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in
this book.
3-3
Major cursors
Lens Cursor
Appears when area zoom function is
selected. The rubber band can be
drawn to magnify an area.
Cross Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart.
Marking Cursor
Appears while operation in following

modes.
Hand Cursor
Appears when the cursor is moved
while pressing and holding down the
left button in the chart area. You can
grip and move the chart freely.
Information Mark
Tidal Stream Mark
Highlight
LOP
Edit Cursor
Appears while moving object in User
Map Editor/ Manual Update and
Route Graphic mode. Used to change
objects and WPTs.
OffSt Offset Cursor
Arrow Cursor (Pointer)

Indicates the position on the display
panel, menu title bar and panel
(dialogue box, etc.)
Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart
while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Update mode and Route Graphic
mode.
Appears while setting offset in Adjust

Cursor mode.
Select Chart Under Cursor (ARCS)
Auto Mode Cursor
Appears while select chart in following

mode.
In each of the following modes, it

Click EBL/VRM line and operating
Click AIS Filter line and operating
(ARCS Only)
Click AZ Function line and operating
EBL/VRM Setting Cursor

Appears while setting EBL/VRM in
context menu.
changes to the cursor with the angle.
3-4
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu

As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:
(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
ECDIS
(3) Selecting the submenu/options
(1) Opening the menu

For opening the menu, move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
[Menu Title Bar]
How to close the menu:

Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.
3-5
(2) Selecting [(6) Chart] ([MENU] - [(6) Chart])

Select the [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.
Step-by-step operation to select [(6) Chart] menu:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(6) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(6) Chart] menu will open.
Explained as Left-click [(6) Chart].
The [(6) Chart] menu opens.
3-6
(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]

1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the Location/Attribute panel will open.
Shifting the cursor

will also open the
submenu.
How to Close the Panel:

Left-click the [OK] or [Cancel].
[OK]:
Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]:
Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.
3-7
ECDIS
3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu

You may use the context menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).
Example: By right-clicking on the chart display
Right-clicking the chart may

open a context menu.
3-8
Left-click a menu item you want.

e.g. Zoom Area.
Note:
In case of various operations which used the cursor, the operation can be aborted by choosing
"Abort" of the context menu.
Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.
ECDIS
Left-click Abort to abort the current COG:
3-9
3.1.2 Various Panels

The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.
Value entry box

You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the entry box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry
box, if any, or the [ENT] key.
Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the
dropdown list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.
Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.
3-10
Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.
Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
ECDIS
The check mark () shows that the

selected item is set to ON.
Option button (Radio button)

You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark
shows the
selected item.
List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark ( ) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.
To scroll up/down the list:

Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
While left-clicking the scroll bar, move
the trackball so that it moves upward or
downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right
side or at the bottom of the panel.
Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.
3-11
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters

You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic
buttons on the display or optional full key board.
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard

Note:
You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not
installed.
1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.
Screws (2 places)
2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.
Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.
3-12
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard

To input data, you can use numerical keyboard or Like the PS/2 keyboard.
By the column, the kind of the keyboard is changes.
Numerical keyboard:
Left-click to value entry box, numerical keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.3 Numerical Input)
ECDIS
(Input a number)
(Input latitude)
(Input the time)
Like the PS/2 keyboard:

Left-click to text box, Like the PS/2 keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.4 Character Input)
(Input comments)
3-13
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input

This section explains the numerical input rules.
Inputting number is displayed value entry box.
The function of each button is as follows.
[1] ~ [9], [0]: Input number is displayed right side that likes an electronic calculator.
[+]/[-], [N]/[S], [E]/[W]: Change contents except a number.
Plus / Minus, North / South, East / West
[CLR]: Clear the inputted value, and display default value.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data, and close the software keyboard.
[Close]: Clear the inputted value and returns to default value, and close the software keyboard.
Example of inputting the numeric 4334.187S on LAT:

1) Left-Click on the LAT column. The software keyboard is displayed.
LAT column is displayed default value.
2) Input [4] on software keyboard. Inputting value is displayed LAT.

[4]
3) Similarly, input on software keyboard as follows.
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[8]
[7]
3-14
4)
After inputting [LAT], left click the [S] bottom.
ECDIS
5)
Input [ENT] on software keyboard, the software keyboard is closed and the input data is fixed.
3-15
3.1.3.4 Character Input

This section explains the character input rules.
Inputting character is displayed on software keyboard. When fix data, the text area is entered the data.
The input character is displayed behind a character cursor. The character cursor is moved by <-, -> key
or left-clicking on input area.
The function of each button is as follows.
Alphanumeric key, Symbol key: Input character behind a character cursor on input area.
[Space]: Input space behind a character cursor on input area.
[BS]: Delete character before a character cursor.
[<-]: Move character cursor to the left.
[->]: Move character cursor to the right.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data. Then the software keyboard is closed and the text area is entered
the
data.
[Close]: Clear the inputted text, and close the software keyboard. The text area is displayed
default
data.
The following button is changed to arrangement of software keyboard.
[abc]: Input the lowercase characters.
[ABC]: Input the uppercase characters.
[!#]: Input the symbol characters.
[Align]: In the setting [abc] or [ABC], change to arrange the software keyboard.
QWERTY or alphabetization
Example of inputting the characters Note 1:

Text box
1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, press the [ABC] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is uppercase
characters.
3) Press the [N] key to input [N].
Character cursor
4) Press the [abc] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is lowercase characters.
5) Press the [o] button to input o.
6) Press the [t] button to input t.
7) Press the [e] button to input e.
8) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENT] key to fix the entry.
1
3-16
3.2 General Flowchart

The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-701B/901B and the flowchart for sailing.
3.2.1 General Flowchart

Power switch ON
[Startup Menu]
[Startup Screen]
ECDIS
Select [Navigation &

Planning] in Startup Menu
Startup Screen
Input ARCS PIN
(ARCS only)
[Navigation & Planning Screen]
Navigation & Planning

Screen
Adjustments
Screen brightness
Operation panel brightness
Sound volume
Radar overlay, etc.
Sailing
[Navigation & Planning] will be

automatically displayed if [ ] is
left- clicked or no operation is
conducted for 10 seconds.
Display panel
(Information
display area)
(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 Flowchart for

Sailing.)
(From the [MENU])
Selects [Route]
Selects [To WPT]
Sailing monitoring
Alarm monitor
(Arrival, Route, etc.)
Operation panel
operation
Display panel
operation
Menu operation
Route Planning
Table editing
Graphical editing
Create alternate route
Chart Editing
User Map editor
Manual Update
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 only)
Exit and shutdown
Press the [POWER] key

on the operation panel
Power switch OFF
3-17
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing

Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be
heard. Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the
[ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] on the
display panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
Sailing start
Select [Route]
Select the [Route] you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
shown.)
Select [To WPT]
Select the [To WPT] (for example 1 or Auto Select).
Move you ship to the sea
Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.
Ship's bearing
To WPT
Bearing to the To WPT
Your ship's symbol
Note:
Be sure that the background color is not sky
blue. If it is sky blue, your ship position is
shifted by the offset function. In this case,
return its color to gray. See, 3.34.4 Canceling
the Ship Offset.
Next Page
About Auto Sailing:

You can use automatic sailing when using together with the Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see
chapter 6 Automatic Sailing.
3-18
Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued

The sequel from the
pre-page
When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated next
WPT, and an Arrived at WPT alarm occurs.
Route monitoring
("Arrived at WPT" alarm
occurs when arrived at the
WPT.)
It repeats itself until the
ship arrives at the last
WPT before the final
destination.
Arrived at the final destination
("Arrived at LAST WPT" alarm
occurs.)
After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
ECDIS
panel to stop the alarm.

[Alarm Acknowledgement] button
When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination, "Arrived at
LAST WPT" alarm will occur.
After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
panel to stop the alarm.
Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
Unload the route
End of sailing
3-19
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation

How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination
sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER])

On the operation panel
Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light.
After a short while, the startup menu will be
displayed.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature,
do pre-heat less than 30 minutes.
[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting
3-20
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu

The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be
displayed.
You can select one of items.
If [
] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen will
be displayed.
Chart Portfolio
ECDIS
You can update the S-57/ARCS chart. Left-clicking this

menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See Additional
Manual for Chart Installation.)
Chart Manager
You can update the C-Map chart. Left-clicking this menu
will open the Chart Manager screen. (See Additional
Manual for Chart Installation.)
Playback
The sailed passage can be replayed by the Playback
feature. When left-clicking this menu, Playback screen is
displayed.(See chapter 8 Playback.)
Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 Color
Pattern (S-57))
[Startup Menu]
Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2
Gray Scale)
Note:
[Navigation & Planning] will be automatically
displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.
3-21
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS

Only)
1) If ARCS has been installed, the ARCS PIN panel will be displayed after [Navigation & Planning]
is selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button. The
[Startup screen] will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is
left-clicked on the ARCS PIN panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS has
not been installed, however, the ARCS PIN panel will not be displayed. The [Startup screen]
will be displayed instead.
Note:
ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the ARCS PIN
panel.
ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the ARCS PIN
panel.
The ARCS PIN panel is displayed only
once
after
[Navigation
&
Planning]
is
selected.
To show the ARCS PIN panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.
Note:
Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.
[Startup Screen]
3-22
2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a short
while.
[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]
ECDIS
3-23
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation

Press the [POWER] key.
The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.
[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit
Note:
If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, gray screen will be displayed about
20 seconds, but the power will eventually be turn off.
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume

Perform the following adjustments as required.
(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])

Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.
JAN-701B
JAN-901B
Brilliance control
Brilliance control
3-24
(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])

Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the operation panel brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.
Menu operation:
ECDIS
1) In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
In the User Chart editing menu
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed in [Keyboard] of [Brilliance].
Tool area on display panel operation:

1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed by left-clicking the panel brightness switch button.
Panel brightness
switch button
Each time you left-click the button, The operation panel brightness changes.
(3) Brightness of the radar overlay image ([VID])

Menu operation:
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Rader Video] of [Brilliance].

1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch.
2) The brightness of Radar overlay image is changed by left-clicking the Video brightness switch .
Video brightness switch
Each time you press the key, the brightness of Radar overlay image changes.
3-25
(4) Brightness of the AIS/TT target symbol ([TGT])

Menu operation:
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Target Symbol] of [Brilliance].

1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The panel brightness of target symbol is changed by left-clicking the [TGT] button.
[TGT] button
Each time you press the key, the brightness of target symbol changes.
(5) Volume Adjustment

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
The Buzzer Volume panel will appear.
3-26
2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by moving the scroll bar of each alarm type. *1
3) To fix the changed setting and to close the panel, press OK. When pressing Cancel , the panel
is closed and the setting returns to the original condition.
*1 The volume of lift click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.
Explanation and example of alarm type (Refer to 10.1 Alarm function)

Alarm Type
Explanation
Example (Alarm message)
System Alarm
Communication connection error and
POSN 1(Data)
hardware error
POSN1 shifted
AC offline
Operation Miss
Specifying an unrelated place
No Object
Exceeding the number of displays of
Not Allowed
AIS/TT
AIS 95% Capacity
Key ACK
Operating the key to the operation panel
(Pushing [ALARM ACK] key)
Setting Alarm
The initialization of ECDIS is insufficient
Safety contour not set

Safety depth not set
Navigation Alarm
Urgent warning on auto sail
Call-back navigator
Navigation Alarm
Nearing a dangerous object and an area
Crossing Safety Contour
Mid
Encountered abnormality of sailing
Approaching Wreck
Navigation Alarm
A variety of alarms of the others except
Timer
Low
the above.
CPA/TCPA
High
Dragging anchor
Loaded different datum chart
3-27
ECDIS
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])

You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the
bridge. Select one of the following display colors
DAY1 (Day Bright)
DAY2 (Day Whiteback) For S-57/C-MAP only
DAY3 (Day Blackback)
DUSK (Dusk)
For S-57/C-MAP only
NIGHT (Night)
Key operation:
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
The order with which the display color switches over to:
DAY3-DAY2-DAY1-DUSK-NIGHT-DUSK-DAY1-DAY2-DAY3-DAY2-...
Note: When leaving for 3 seconds from the operation when operating from the darker one to the
lighter one, next key operation becomes operation from the lighter one to the darker one.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order, and
then select one of items you want.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order
Day-Night level
Day Bright
Day Whiteback (S-57/C-MAP)
Day Blackback
Dusk (S-57/C-MAP)
Night
When you select the level in "Day/Night" list and push [OK] or [Apply] button, the display color of
the screen will be changed.
3-28

1) Tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) Display color is changed by [Day-Night level] switch button.
[Day-Night level] switch button

Each time you press the key, the display color changes. The order which a display color switches
over to is the same as the key operation. (Refer to "Key operation".)
Note:
When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed
information difficult to read/see.
3-29
ECDIS
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])

When the alarm occurs, the buzzer sounds and the alarm contents are displayed in the alarm display
area on the display panel to notify the operator of an alarm. When more than one alarm occurs, it changes
an alarm display every second.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or
left-click the alarm acknowledge-button on the display panel to acknowledge the alarm. When confirming
an alarm, the buzzer sound stops and the alarm display disappears from the alarm acknowledge-button.
However, until the cause of the alarm is removed, in the alarm display area, the alarm maintains a
displayed condition.
[Alarm List] button displays the alarm record which occurred recently. When you want to see the alarm
which occurred in the past, it chooses "Logbook" from the menu. (See 3.26 Logbook)
The alarm acknowledge-button
[Alarm List]
botton
The alarm display area

Memo: For alarm settings, see 7.10 Setting the Alarm Options.
(1) When no alarm is found

If no alarm is found, the alarm display area displays [No Alarm].
Nothing is displayed here.
Displaying [No Alarm]
(2) When an alarm occurs

An alarm is displayed at the alarm acknowledge-button and in the alarm display area and the alarm
sound sounds.
Displaying the alarm
Blinking every 0.5 seconds
3-30
(3) Acknowledging and canceling of the alarm (Stopping the alarm sound)
Notes:
Until it confirms the cause of the alarm, don't acknowledge an alarm.
1) The procedure of the alarm acknowledgement operation
Press the [ALARM ACK] key.
ECDIS
On the display panel

Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.
The alarm sound stops and the alarm display on the alarm acknowledge-button disappears.
However, in the alarm display area, it maintains the condition which the alarm occurred to.
To erase an alarm from the alarm display area, the problem which the alarm generated must
be solved.
No Alarm
Alarm occurs
Ex: The communication error occurs in POSN1.
The Alarm occurrence condition
(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound sounds.
Blinking the alarm
Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.
Or, press
The Alarm occurrence condition
key.
(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound stops
Disappearing the alarm
Resolved the occurring alarm
Maintaining the alarm displaying.
Ex.: The communication of POSN1 becomes

possible.
No Alarm
2) If two or more alarms have occurred, the display of the alarm acknowledge-button and the
display of the alarm display area is displaying alarm contents changed every second. When
acknowledging alarm, the acknowledgement operation is done about the displayed alarm when
operating.
3-31
(4) Displaying the alarm list

1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the Alarm List panel opens.
If you open the Alarm List panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the Alarm List
also blinks.
After confirmation, you can acknowledge the blinking alarm by left-clicking the [ACK] button.
You can also open the Alarm List panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
3-32
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.

* When opening Alarm List once again, the tab to have been selecting last opens.
Detailed Alarm List refers to "9.1Alarm Function".

Icon blinks in red:
The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.
Title of the tab displaying red:

Some alarm in the tab occurs.
ECDIS
No Icon:
The alarm does not
occur in the current
system configuration.
Icon in green:
No alarm.
ACK button in red, and blinking words:

Some alarm occurs and there are not acknowledged yet.
ACK button in red, and displaying words:
Some alarm occurs and all alarms are acknowledged.
ACK button in green:
No alarm.
3-33
[System Alarm Status] tab:

[System alarm status] is the alarm list of the hardware error and the communication error.
[System alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
No.1 Position Data Alarm
No.2 Position Data Alarm
No.1 Position Shift Alarm
Position Difference Alarm
Radar Data Alarm
Target Data Track Alarm
Gyro Data Alarm
Log Data Alarm
Autopilot Data Alarm
Hardware Alarm
[NAV. Alarm Status] tab:
[NAV. alarm status] is the list of the alarm which needs to solve when occurring during navigation.
[NAV. alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
Safety contour Alarm
Dangerous Alarm
Route Monitoring Alarm
Target Alarm
LAT. Limit Over Alarm
Anchor Alarm
Chart Alarm
ARCS Alarm
Area Alarm
[INFO/Warning] tab:
[INFO/Warning] is the list of the Information and Warning.
"Information" alarm occurs when not doing the initial setting. Alarm icon color is in blue when
occurring.
"Warning" alarm occurs when become condition that it should be careful of the sailing.
Alarm icon color is in yellow when occurring. "Warning" alarm is not need to acknowledge.
However, the alarm is displayed in the alarm display area during the occurrence.
3-34
(5) Displaying the alarm Log table

You can display the alarm Log on the sailing.
Note:
The alarm history is displayed only latest 20 items. To check the past alarm lists, see 3.26
Logbook.
Menu operation:
ECDIS
Select the System Alarm Log tab or NAV.Alarm Log tab after open the Alarm List panel.
3-35
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.

Alarm:
Displaying alarm
contents
Detected:
Displaying date when
the alarm occurred.
Acknowledge:
Displaying date when the
alarm acknowledged.
Icon blinks in red:

The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
No Icon:
The alarm is removed.
Removed*:
Displaying date when
the alarm removed.
All Clear:
Erase all displays of the alarm
except for the occurring alarm
*When switching off the power without acknowledge behind the alarm, all alarms are removed.
3-36
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])

You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on the
operation panel.
Note:
To display a radar image, the optional radar board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar
image must be sent from the radar system.
It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by Chart Portfolio.
If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/
12/24/48/96/120nm).
If Display Color is [DAY1] or [DAY2], Display Color changes [DAY3] when radar display turn on.
For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.
Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.32 1Setting Radar Options
(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When Radar2 is displayed, the echo of Radar2 becomes hidden.
Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:
Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When [Radar1] is displayed, the echo of Radar1 becomes hidden.
3-37
ECDIS
Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.
Turning ON/OFF the Bearing Scale:
1) It makes a Radar1 or Radar2 valid.
Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Bearing Scale] in that order.
Each time you left-click [Bearing Scale], the bearing scale display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [Bearing Scale].
The bearing scale will be superimposed on the chart.
(2) Radar Overlay Setting from the menu

Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Setting] in that order.
[Radar Overlay Setting] panel is displayed.
The following item can be adjusted:
[Gain]: Gain can be adjusted.
[Sea]: Sea can be adjusted.
[Rain]: Rain can be adjusted.
[Video]: Video can be adjusted.
Radar echo adjustment screen closes when left-click the [Close] button.
(3) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel

Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.
3-38
(4) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)

Note:
If menu panel adjustment ([(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] Rader Option
panel) is selected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to
activate the dials. For details, see 3.32.1 Setting Radar Options.
[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes
The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right
increases the brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.
[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter
The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images
of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces
sea clutter. So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial
turned as far as possible to the left.
[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter
The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the
[SEA] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small
boats.
[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity
The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right
increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be
observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.
3-39
ECDIS
3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display

You can turn ON/OFF the AIS/TT target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the
menu.
Note:
TT information is displayed only when it is received from the TT device system.
AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS device system.
For AIS/TT target settings, (see 3.33 .1AIS/TT Setting).
3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF

(1) AIS/TT display ON/OFF using the operation panel
Press the [AIS/TT] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.
(2) AIS/TT display ON/OFF from the menu

"TT 1" "TT 2" "AIS" can be independently selected. Selecting [All] can turns ON/OFF "TT 1" "TT 2"
"AIS" displays at the same time.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
Each time you select [(1) TT1], [(2) TT2], or [(3) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(4) All], items [(1) TT1] [(2) TT2] [(3) AIS] are simultaneously turned ON/OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the mark is attached.
(3) Built-in of co-processor

Internal TT target is displayed on the Chart.
3-40
3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list

Note that the items Bearing, Distance, CPA ,TCPA in the table are the filtered value by the
AIS/TT settings. See 3.33.1 AIS/TT Setting .
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
ECDIS
The All List panel opens.

2) Perform the following operation.
Left-click one of the tabs, to open the TT1 or TT2 or AIS list.
When you opened AIS tab, the [View AIS Detail] becomes active.
Left-click the [Close] to close the All List panel.
3) AIS Filter
It is displayed according to the display range item which was set in AIS filter.
See 3.33.1 AIS/TT Setting .
3-41
List items:
The items are the same for "TT1" "TT2" "AIS". The P1, P2, etc. are the target number.
Bearing:
Bearing to the AIS/TT target
Range:
Distance to the AIS/TT target
Heading: Heading of the AIS/TT target

COG:
Course of the AIS/TT target
SOG:
Speed of the AIS/TT target
Position: Position of the AIS/TT target

CPA:
Closest Point of Approach
TCPA:
Time to Closest Point of Approach
Status:
Status of the AIS/TT target
[View AIS Detail] button function:

You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this [View AIS Detail], the AIS Information panel will open.
Left-click the [Close] to close the AIS Information panel.
[The item of AIS Information]
3-42
Target ID:
Ships Name:
Name of the AIS target ship
MMSI:
9-digit unique user ID
Status:
Sleeping / Activated / Lost
NAV Status
up to 10 characters
0: Under Way Using Engine: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined
Call Sign:
Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)
IMO No.:
9-digit number
CPA:
Closest point of approach to the AIS target
TCPA:
Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
Position Sensor:
Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: NOT DEFINED
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS:
GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C:
Loran-C
5: Chayka:
Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System
7: Surveyed:
Measuring type
8-15: Not used:
Not used
Position Accuracy:
[>10m] / [<10m]
3-43
ECDIS
Ships Type:
Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer,
or a width of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A
vessel that is dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater
operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in
military operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment):
Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels
defined by the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
Latitude:
Longitude:
Bearing:
Range:
COG:
SOG:
Length:
Beam:
Draft:
Heading:
Rate of Turn:
Destination:
ETA:
The latitude at which the AIS target is situated

The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
Distance between own ship and the AIS target
Bearing of the AIS target
Speed of the AIS target
Length of the AIS target
Beam of the AIS target
Draft of the AIS target
Heading of the AIS target
Turning speed of the AIS target
Destination of the AIS target
ETA of AIS target
3-44
Note:
The AIS system equipped on own ship also has the own ship's AIS data to transmit for another
ship. Own ships AIS data can be confirmed according to the following menu.
Select [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(9)Own Ships AIS Data] in that order.(Ex.:normal menu
ECDIS
3-45
3.3.9.3 Target Track

Maximum of 200 Target Track are displayed. When more than 200, it is erased from old Target Track.
Even if it changes [Target Memory Interval], the point which was displayed by the first setting is
displayed just as it is
When setting [Target Memory Interval] in the distance interval, it is displayed when moving the
distance that a movement except the straight line was specified.
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order..
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order. [Target
Track Setting] panel is displayed.
Target Track can be displayed in a maximum of 200.
Check ONTarget Track is displayed.
Check OFFTarget Track is not displayed.
[Target Track Color & Display] panel is

displayed.
Target Track is displayed every [3sec] [5sec]
[10sec] [30sec] [1min] [3min] [5mim] [10min]
[30min] [60min] [1NM] [3NM] [5NM] [10NM].
[OFF] : Target Track is not cleared.

[All] : Clear all.
[(Color)] : Clear Target Track of selected color.
[OFF] Target Track is not cleared.

[All] : Clear all.
[Target Track No. xx] : Clear Target Track of selected number.
[Other] : Clear to No11 from No20.
3-46
2) Property Mode
Right-click on the chart and it selects [TGT Property] from the shortcut menu in the normal menu.
Then move the cursor on the target and left-click. The following screen is displayed.
TT
ID of Target Track is displayed
It is possible to change into the specified

color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
Target Track Number isn't displayed.
AIS
ID of AIS is displayed
It is possible to change into the specified

color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
AIS Target Number isn't displayed.
3-47
ECDIS
3) Target Track Setting [Color] tab

[Target Track Color & Display] panel from left-click [Target Track Color & Display].
The color of TT can be changed and be displayed.
[Individual]: All Target Tracks are valid
[(Color)]:
All Target Tracks are valid with selected

color.
[Olive][Blue][Cyan][Green][Yellow][Orange]
[Brown][Red][Pink][Magenta][White]
[OFF]:
When selecting [OFF], Target Track of selected
number isn't displayed.
[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No10]:
Each number is changed to the color which the
color of selected Target Track select.
[Other]:
[Other] is changed to the color which the color of
Target Track No11 - No20 selects.
4) Target Track Setting [Display] tab
In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
[Target Track Color & Display] panel from [Display] tab is displayed from left-click [Target Track
Color & Display]. The valid or invalid of the display of Target Track can be selected.
[Individual]: Each of Target Track can be individually selected.

[OFF]:
All Target Track are not displayed.
[ON]:
All Target Track are displayed.
[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No.10]:

Each display or hide can be selected.
[Other]: Display or hide of Targets Track No.11 - No.22 can be
selected.
3-48
3.3.9.4 File operation

Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [Target Track] - [File operation] in that order.
[File Operations] panel is displayed.
Save, Erase, Load and so on of Target Track. can be operated.
Saved file name and date are displayed.
[Save Target Track File] panel is displayed.

It is possible to input of file name and save at this
panel.
The file name is to the alphanumeric 10 character.
When there is same file name, message to confirm
overwrite is displayed.
File of list can be loaded when clicking [Load]

button.
When the Target Track has loaded, "Current Target
Track is deleted, is that OK?" message is
displayed.
Selected file is displayed in [Target Track Display]

box when clicking [Select] button.
File in list can be deleted when clicking [Erase]

button.
The file can not be recovered when erasing, is that
OK? message is displayed and can selected [Yes]
or [No].
Target Track which is selected by [Target Track Display]
box can be displayed when putting a check.
* [Erase] button, [Load] button, [Select] button doesn't work when not choosing a file.
* The file can save in 9999. When saving any more, the error message is displayed and can not save.
* During select In [Target Track Display] box, that file isn't changed.
3-49
ECDIS
3.3.9.5 Display Received Message

It displays the message which was sent from AIS.
Addressed Message (Displays the sent message from AIS to the own ship)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(1)Addressed Messages] in that order.
Broadcast Message (Displays the message which was sent without specifying an address from AIS)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(2)Broadcast Messages] in that order.
3.3.9.6 AIS sentence

The sentence form that receives AIS is selected. Please confirm the specification of the AIS
device of the ship, and select an appropriate sentence.
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(0) AIS Message] and the following sentences in that order.
(1)VDM
(2)TTD1
(3)TTD2
3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets

The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for
activating and deactivating AIS targets.
Activating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the context menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The
AIS target will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be
displayed.
When the cursor move the target, MMSI (the ships name) and CPA/TCPA are displayed.
Deactivating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS
target will become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.
3-50
Inactive
Active
Deactivating all:
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.
3-51
ECDIS
3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target

Left-click on the AIS/TT target displayed on the screen so that AIS/TT information will be on the
Select List panel on the display panel.
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [TGT Data] from the context menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the AIS/TT target, and then left-click.
The Select List panel will open and AIS/TT target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the Select List panel open in advance,
- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the Select List panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] provided in each panel. As other way, select
[Cancel TGT Data] on the context menu and left-click the target. If there is a target below the deleted
target, it moves up by one.
Bearing:
Bearing towards the AIS/TT target
Target ID:
ID of the TT/AIS target
CPA:
Closest point of approach to the AIS
target
Range:
Range to the TT/AIS target
TCPA:
Time to closest point of approach
to the AIS target
COG:
Course to the TT/AIS target
SOG:
Speed of the TT/AIS target
[Additional] tab
[Common] tab
Name:
Name of the AIS target (not
displayed for TT targets)
[Release] button:
Release the selected target.
Position:
Current position of the AIS/TT target
Status:
Current status of the AIS/TT target
3-52
3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard)

This function is a monitoring function so as not to lose sight of the man overboard point when person
falls from ship.
1) Start MOB mode
In the Display panel
Left-click [MOB] .
ECDIS
In the operation panel

Push [MOB] key.
Then, the point where the mode started is marked as MOB point, and the MOB information
panel is displayed.
MOB Point symbol
Bearing and range from own ship
MOB information panel

POSN (Position):
Coordinates of MOB point
BRG (Bearing):
Bearing from own ship to
MOB
RNG (Range):
Range from own ship to
MOB
NM/km/sm:
Each time this button is
Own ship symbol
pushed, the unit of range

changes
NM: nautical mile
Km: kilometer
sm: statute mile
TTG (Time to go):
Time until arriving at MOB
2) End MOB mode
In the Display panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] for three seconds or more.
In the operation panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] key for three seconds or more.
Then, the MOB panel close, and the MOB point symbol display on the chart disappears.
3-53
Note
The following information can change by the administrator setting.

Display/Non-display of [MOB] button on the Display Panel
Display/Non-display of MOB information panel.
Switch of MOB Time(TTG or Time)
[MOB] button is non-displays it.
State of Time display (Display after MOB mode starts at elapsed time)
3-54
3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk

Drive and DVD
Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the floppy disk drive and the DVD
drive .
ECDIS
Eject button:
Use to eject a floppy disk.
Eject button:
Use to open and close the tray.
Floppy disk drive
Access lamp:
Will light green when the writing to
or reading from a floppy disk
DVD drive
Access lamp:
Will light green when information is
being read from the CD/DVD.
Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.
3-55
3.4 Shifting the Chart

The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
[HOME] button
Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
[Port List] button
Using the position entry panel
3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button

At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to
advance. This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.
Key operation:
Press the [HOME] key.
Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.
Your ship will return to a

position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.
Own ship symbol
[Screen Display of Home Position]
3-56
3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor

You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then,
the position becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode.
True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of
the chart.
ECDIS
2) Left-click at that position.
Cross cursor intersecting point
[Moving to the Center of the Screen]
Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.
[Moving the location of ship display]
3-57
3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor

You can grip the chart and move it freely.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor
changes to the hand cursor
Hand cursor
Note:
If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.
3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]

If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the
registered scale.
To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] .
Note:
Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.8.1 Adding to My
Port List.
(1) Button operation to jump to the port

Left-click the [Port List] .
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.
Registered position as a port
3-58
(2) Menu operation to jump to the port

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
The My Port List panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
ECDIS
- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] .
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] .
3.4.5 Displaying
Position
the
Chart
by
Entering
the
You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] .
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the
[OK] .
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the
designated position.
3-59
3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/ context menu)
Range selection (Range drop-down list)
Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)
3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the
operation panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the context menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area A you want to enlarge, and
left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area B you want to enlarge,
and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.
Selected area
[Zooming area using the rubber band]
Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale
is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. When there is
not a chart which can be displayed, a background chart is displayed.
3-60
3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Scale]/[Range]
drop-down list button.
(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or
ECDIS
the scale set by the system.

- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only). For scales, see
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).
(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel

Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] .
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount
set by the system.
Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs
if the displayed chart is more than double in size than the
original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the
right will be displayed on the chart and will appear to notify
lower chart accuracy and clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made
larger (double or more) through proper operation.
3-61
Warning lines for overscaling
3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.
(1) Switching the range using the display panel

Left-click the range switching drop-down list .
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list
changes green.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.
Range drop-down list
Zoomed out
This indicator lights up

when Range is valid.
Zoomed in
3-62
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.
(1) Switching the scale using the display panel

Left-click the scale switching drop-down list.
2) Left-click the scale in the list.
ECDIS
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
Scale drop-down list
Zoomed out
This indicator lights up

when Scale is valid.
Table editing
Graphical editing
Create alternate
route
Zoomed in
3-63
3.6 Changing the Object Category

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three
object categories, base display, standard display, and all information(other). You can change the object
category using the display panel.
Base Display:
Standard Display:
Other Display:
Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ships
safety contour.
Objects less important than base display, such as drying line, indication of fixed and
floating aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and
details of all isolated dangers.
Note:
The initial chart screen status is Standard Display. For safety for sailing, use the standard display
or Other display, and not the base display.
You can change the object category by left-clicking the [Base], [Standard], or [Other] on the display
panel.
1) Left-click Object Category drop-down list.
Category drop-down list
You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [Standard] and [Other]
display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should be
displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been
set for display.
will display all objects that belong to standard display.
For selection of object display, see 3.28.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.

About the display in the chart area:
You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers are
used to make up the chart display. For example, standard display
consists of the base display and information (objects) for
standard display. This means that the base display is the basic
one layer and the information for standard display is another
layer, and the standard display is made up by overlapping both
layers.
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc.
3-64
Layer
Layer
Layer
Layer
EVENT mark, etc..

Objects of "Other"
Objects of "Standard"
Objects of "Base"
[Base display example]
ECDIS
[Standard display example]
[Other display example]
Note:
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.
3-65
3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode

You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart
using the display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable mode differs depending on the
chart type, either S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3/ARCS.
S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:

[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth
For [Rotation] mode
Motion
True
Relative
Free
North Up
Course Up
WPT Up
Rotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Motion drop-down
list button
Azimuth drop-down
list button
ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button
(1)
Explanation of each mode:
For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot
use the combination of [True] or [Free] mode and [Course Up] and [WPT Up] mode. Also, on the ARCS
chart, you cannot select Azimuth mode.
1) Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):
True
Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display.
When own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that
own ship always remains on the screen.
Relative Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move
relatively.
Free
You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ships direction of travel.
Also, as the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.
3-66
[True Mode]
Fixed
[Relative Mode]
Heading line
[Free Mode]
Heading line
Fixed
Heading line
Own ship
Own ship
Own ship
Own ship
Fixed
ECDIS
Note:
While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.
2) Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Only):

North Up The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not
flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily
be read out.
Course Up The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
WPT Up The chart automatically rotates so that To WPT up on the display.
Rotation
You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.
[North Up Mode]
[Course Up Mode]
Heading line
Heading line
Own ship
Own ship
[Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees

Heading line
[WPT Up Mode]
To WPT
Heading line
Own ship
Own ship
3-67
3) Mode change caused by the operation:

In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically changed from the current mode to
another one.
From [True] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means
of the [Port List] on the display panel.
From [Relative] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [Port List] on the display panel.
From [Free] mode to [True] mode:
- When the [Home] is left-clicked.
The [Rotation] made in [Free] mode is retained if the mode is changed over to [True].
Note:
[Course Up/WPT Up/Rotation] is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.
3-68
3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode

You can select Motion mode using the display panel.
Note:
While [Chart Portfolio] is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.
(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel

ECDIS
Left-click the Motion drop-down list.

Motion drop-down
list button
2) Select one of items (True, Relative, Free) by left-clicking it.
3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode

You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel.
(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel

1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list on the display panel.
Azimuth drop-down
list button
For [Rotation] mode
2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, WPT Up) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
If you select [Rotation], enter its rotational angle in degrees. (000.0 359.9 degrees).
If [True] or [Free] is selected in Motion mode, Course Up and WPT Up cannot be selected.
3-69
3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode

Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other
charts will be loaded.
Note:
For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.
(1) Setting Fix mode using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.
Example use of Chart Fix mode:
If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart
(JP24NC9G) will be loaded to replace the chart automatically.
1:30,000
JP44OJBE
1:250,000
JP24NC9G
If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and
no other chart will be loaded to replace it.
1:30,000
JP44OJBE
1:250,000
JP44OJBE
3-70
3.8 My Port List

3.8.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access
to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:
Select a chart and scale.
Register the position to the My
Shift the position you want approximately
Port List using the menu.
at the center of the chart.

1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.
S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.4 Shifting the Chart)
and zoom in/out the chart (see 3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart
(S-57/C-MAP Only)) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
Select right-click-[Select Chart under Cursor] or [Select Chart] on Display panel in that order.
For details, see 3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor
(ARCS Only) or 3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu,
In the Table User Chart Editing menu
The Add to my Port List panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Up to 15 characters can be input.
3-71
ECDIS
To display the chart registered as My Port List:

Left-click the [Port List] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]
3.8.2 Deleting My Port List

You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:
The My Port List panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] to close the panel.
3-72
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57

Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be
monitored at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] .
The Select Chart panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
By pressing the [HOME] on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.
3-73
ECDIS
3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options

(ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] on the display panel, [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] in the context menu)
Various options accessible from the menu
3.10.1 Selecting
Larger/Smaller
Only)
Chart
(ARCS
In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the
[RANGE+/-] key on the operation panel.
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Left-click the [Large Chart] or [Small Chart]
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.
Note:
An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of
error messages, see 9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart.
3-74
3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor

(ARCS Only)
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the context menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart]
panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
ECDIS
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
Note:
When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area
where a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be
displayed in gray.
3-75
3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)

You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.
1) Left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the display panel.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
You can open the Select Chart panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] on the
display panel.
3-76
3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)

A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the context menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.
ECDIS
Blue square
[Selected chart]
3-77
3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart

(ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the context menu.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.
3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart

(ARCS Only)
1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the High Resolution Area from the context menu
by left-clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area
surrounded by the orange frame shows are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.
Orange frame
[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]
3-78
3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)

You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the context menu.
The Note and Diagram panel opens.
ECDIS
2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are
displayed. The panel can be closed with the [Close] , and the chart will return to the original
display position.
Note:
The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.
3-79
3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary

Notice (ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The Temporary and Preliminary panel opens.
Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.
2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK].
Then, the Information panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is
displayed as shown in the picture.
Temporary and Preliminary Notices can be displayed only when the chart has been
updated.
Note:
The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.
3-80
3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)

(1) Entering offset
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.
Note:
Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The Chart Shift panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK]
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear]
If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that
value will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] will return the
display to that value.
3-81
ECDIS
Using the Cursor:

1) In the Chart Shift panel, left-click the [by Cursor].
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange
line to determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the Chart Shift panel. (You can edit the
value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Orange Line
Cursor
The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be
displayed in blue, and Chart Shift will be displayed in Panel of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.
Shift amount
3-82
(2) Transforming the datum

You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ships position to the WGS-84 system.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
The Datum Transformation panel opens.
2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:

Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
Left-click the [Ship Position] to enter the own ships position.
Left-click the [by Cursor] and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the position
is entered.
3) Left-click the Geodetic Datum From drop-down list, then select the geodetic system of the
conversion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be
displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box,
left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be
displayed in blue. Chart will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.
3-83
ECDIS
Note:
Chart position for the WGS-84 system
Chart position for the local

geodetic system
X, Y: Offset value for WGS-84

When X and Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically,
and the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the
primary geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and Chart Shift To WGS-84 is
displayed in the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values
are set in the Datum Transformation panel and the [OK] is left-clicked, and the message The
Datum is already WGS-84 will be displayed on the panel.
3-84
3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways

(Multi View/Wide Range View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two
sections in which the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in
various ways. Also, with the wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the
display panel area.
ECDIS
Active screen
Own ship's symbol
View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen
View 1 screen
View 2 screen
View 2
Inactive screen
Wide view screen
[Multi View and Wide View]
3-85
3.11.1 Multi View Screen

You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The selected screen has active title
bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To change a screen actively, it left-clicks the screen to want to choose. At this time, off-center will be
used to place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the
cursor to the title bar of the view, then left-click.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
When displaying Multi Window, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
- Top Bottom
Chart is displayed dividing top and bottom.
View1 is displayed in upper end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in lower end title
bar.
- Right Left
Chart is displayed dividing right and left.
View1 is displayed in right end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in left end title
bar.
- Right Top View
View2 is displayed in the upper right of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Left Top View
View2 is displayed in the upper left of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Right Bottom View
View2 is displayed in the lower right of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Left Bottom View
View2 is displayed in the lower left of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Select Area
A selected area will be displayed as view 2.
(Refer to 3.11.2 Selecting an Area for more information)
- Wide Range View
[Wide Range View] is displayed in the display panel.
(Refer to 3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) for more information)
3-86
(Single view)
(Top Bottom view)
(Right Left view)
(Right Top view)

View 2
View 1
View 1
View 2
View 1
View 2
(Left Top view)
(Right Bottom view)
(Left Bottom view)

ECDIS
View 1
View 2
View 1
View 1
View 2
View 2
Scale, Range, Motion mode, Azimuth mode can be set to each of View1 and View2.
The following is displayed only in View1. It isn't displayed in View2.
Own ships track, Plan route
Event mark, Information mark, Tide mark, Highlighting, Reference Point, Clearing Line, Cross
Bearing, LOP, AIS, TT, Radar overlay, User map
It is canceled when changing View1/View2 during the following operation.
During EBL maneuver creating
During Make AZ
Multi-view display is canceled when doing the following operation.
Starts the Route Planning
Starts the User Map Editor
Select Single View
Manual Update is reflected in View1 and View2 both.
As for the display panel one of the following, the value of active View in View1/View2 is displayed.
Range
Scale
Motion mode
Azimuth mode
Note:
In View 2, the radar overlay, route, AIS/TT target ship symbols, own ships track, user chart objects
and manual updates are not displayed.
3.11.2 Selecting an Area

A selected area will be displayed as view 2.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed
in the upper right of View1. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is
displayed in view2.
3-87
3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen
section move to the upper part of the screen.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide range view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide range view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue
line and the view 2 chart areas will be surrounded with a red line.
Wide view
Area currently displayed (Blue line)
To close the wide view screen:

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original
place.
3-88
3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT

When you start sailing, select the Route and To WPT as follows: Note that the route file extension shows
the route type. More specifically, the extension .rtn is used for Normal type and .rta is used for TOS
type.
3.12.1 Selecting Route and To WPT Using the

Display Panel
(1) Selecting the route using the display panel
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the Route list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on
the chart.
The initial route status is UNLOAD.
Deleting the route:

To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the
Route list, and then left-click UNLOAD.
The selected route is deleted from the screen.
Note:
If the scheduled route is on floppy /CD/DVD disk, you can copy it to hard disk using the File
Manager. See 7.1 File Manager.
(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel

As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.
Automatic selection (Auto Select):

The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this
waypoint, the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.
2) Left-click the Auto Select.
3-89
ECDIS
Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.
2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the
selected route, left-click 1 in the To WPT drop-down
list.
3-90
3.12.2 Distance Measurement

You can calculate the distance between WPTs or between own ship and a WPT with the calculator
(Distance Measurement panel).
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(3) Distance Measurement] in the order.
Then, the Distance Measurement panel opens.
Distance Measurement panel isn't displayed when not loading a route. Load a route.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] area, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or
[Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WPT number you want
from the [WPT No.] drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by
left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] area, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If
you have selected [Way Point], select the WPT number you want from the [WPT No.]
drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an
arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the
calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box.
Left-click the [Close] button.
[Select Way point/Picked Point/Own Ship.]
[Select WPT No.]
[Resultant]
3-91
ECDIS
Example use of [Distance Measurement] panel:

When selecting [Way Point]
Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WPT No.
The calculation result is displayed.

The route between the selected WPTs is shown in green.
3-92
When selecting [Picked Point]

Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary
Own ship position
point on the route.
ECDIS

The route from the arbitrary point to WPT No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.
When selecting [Own Ship]
Own ship position
Select [Own Ship].
Select WPT to go
through.

The route from the own ship position to WPT No. 03 via selected WPT is shown in green.
3-93
3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm

XTD (Cross Track Distance) Alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
With the following menu, the effectively of the XTD alarm can be changed.
1) In normal menu
Select [(2) Route] - [(4) Use XTD Alarm] in that order.
The check in the menu switches over. When a check is displayed, the XTD alarm becomes ON.
The XTD alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
The XTD alarm doesnt occur when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is OFF.
3-94
3.13 Displaying a User Map

You can display a user chart you have made.
Note:
Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 Chart
Editing.
ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) select User Map] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Open Chart File panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.
To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(2) Unselect User Map] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.
3-95
3.14 Reading Out Information on the

Object
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout.
If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart
(S-57/C-MAP/ARCS).
(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor (
).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]
[S-57/C-MAP Chat Information]
[ARCS Chat Information]
3-96
(2) Displaying additional chart information:

When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in the
combo box under the Information panel.
1)
Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show].
2)
The additional information will be displayed.
To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].

ECDIS
3-97
(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing
line
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the context menu.
).
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens according to the selected object.
The Location/Attributes panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
To delete the object, left-click the [Delete].
To close the panel, left-click the [Close].
[Example for the Event mark:]
3-98
3.15 Displaying the AIO

You can display an AIO (Admiralty Information Overlay) that is additional information published by United
Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO). (But in some software version, the AIO function is not
available.)
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) View AIO] in that order.
ECDIS
AIO is displayed when checkmark is ON. AIO is displayed by a red pattern as below.
(Change the object category to the [Other] on the display panel Refer to3.6 Changing the
Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only))
Un-tick the [View AIO] menu not to display the AIO.
3-99
2) Right-click on the chart to confirm the detail of AIO, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
Information] from the context menu.
).
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.

4) When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be
displayed in the combo box under the Information panel.
5) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show]. The additional
information will be displayed.
To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].
3-100
3.16 Operating EBL/VRM

There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the
chart.
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
Using the context menu ([Dropped EBL/VRM][CCRP EBL/VRM],1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] buttons on the display panel
3.16.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel

On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You
can also set your ships position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.
(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker

If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed
line. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Direction and distance from
Center point to crossing point
Push EBL1 to
display EBL1 line
Push VRM1 to
display VRM1 line
EBL1
VRM1
EBL
VRM
Turn EBL dial to

control EBL1
Turn VRM dial to

control VRM1
Own ship
Crossing point
[EBL1/VRM1 line display on the chart]

Azimuth of EBL1
Distance of VRM1

on EBL1 and VRM1
[Display panel (EBL1/VRM1 displayed)]

To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:
Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.
3-101
ECDIS
(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker

If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash
dotted line to distinguish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers is controlled by turning
the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:
Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.
(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations

The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2
markers are simultaneously displayed. For example, lets assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are
displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be operated by the EBL dial. In this case, press the
[EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by the EBL dial. (See the next page)
These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and VRM2 or EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be displayed by combinations of the previously
displayed EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2. When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only
their bearing and distance will be displayed.
EBL
Turn EBL dial to
control EBL1
VRM
Turn VRM dial to
control VRM2
[Display panel and chart (Operating EBL1 and VRM2)]
Note:
For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating turning the EBL or VRM dial.
3-102
[Switching of EBL1 Marker and EBL2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]
ECDIS
No displaying EBL
EBL1
EBL2
EBL2
EBL1
EBL
EBL
Displaying EBL1
EBL2
Displaying EBL2
EBL2
EBL1
EBL
EBL1
EBL
EBL2
EBL1
Displaying EBL1 and EBL2
Displaying EBL1 and EBL2
(EBL dial operate to EBL2)
(EBL dial operate to EBL1)

3-103
(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point

The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ships position
to another position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 push EBL dial Then, the EBL/VRM base point displayed in the own ship
position.
2) Move the cursor with EBL/VRM to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position
3-104
The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the
ships center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating.
The base point moves on the ship..
ECDIS
[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]
3-105
3.16.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu

You can draw CCRP (the base position is ship-centered) EBL/VRM or Dropped (the base position is
floating) EBL/VRM with context menu.
[Context Menu Dropped EBL/VRM]
[Context Menu CCRP EBL/VRM]
3.16.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option

When both EBL and VRM drawing, you can draw either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and,
after fixing EBL, VRM appears.
Select [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The Marker Setting panel opens.
3-106
2) Left-click either 1 Step or 2 Step and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)
ECDIS
Tips: Useful context Abort

During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following
procedure.
Right-click at any position on the
chart to open the context menu.
Abort context menu will open.
Rotate the trackball to move

the cursor on the Abort.
3-107
Left-click Abort to abort

the current operation step.
3.16.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.
(1) 1-Step Operation
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed with EBl1, and the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is
displayed on the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.
Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM]
Left-Click
- [EBL1/VRM1]
Left-Click
3-108

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
4) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.
ECDIS
Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM]
Left-Click
- [EBL1/VRM1]
Left-Click
Left-Click
3.16.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
3.16.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
3-109
3.16.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM Move Origin1 (Move Origin2)

The following description is an operation to move Origin1 (the base point of EBL1/VRM1).
Moving Origin2 (the base point of EBL2/VRM2) becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [Move Origin1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
3.16.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and there base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.
Select
[CCRP EBL/VRM] -
Left-Click
[EBL1/VRM1]
3-110

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
Select
ECDIS
[CCRP EBL/VRM] [EBL1/VRM1]
Left-Click
Left-Click
3.16.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2)

The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
3.16.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)

The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
3-111
3.16.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel

On the display panel, you can operate and display value of EBL and VRM from Tools panel.
Azimuth of EBL button

T: True North mode
R: Bearing Reference mode
Units of distance button

When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
[NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] ->
switching"Tools""Brilliance"
on EBL1 and VRM1
on EBL2 and VRM2
Base point button
[Blank]: CCRP
D: Dropped point
Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 button
Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 button
Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
EBL1/EBL2 edit button

Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
VRM1/VRM2 edit button
Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.
3-112
3.16.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel

The following description is an operation of EBL1. EBL2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Drawing EBL1 and setting the bearing
1) When EBL1 edit button is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, EBL1 edit button is changed active and EBL1 is displayed.
ECDIS
(2) Deletion EBL1

1) When EBL1 edit button is active, left-click to this button.
Then, EBL1 edit button is changed inactive and EBL1 disappears.
Lift-click to the EBL1 edit button
3.16.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel

The following description is an operation of VRM1. VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Drawing VRM1 and setting the distance
1) When VRM1 edit button is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, VRM1 edit button is changed active and VRM1 is displayed.
(2) Deletion VRM1
1) When VRM1 edit button is active, left-click to this button.
Then, VRM1 edit button is changed inactive and VRM1 disappears
Lift-click to the VRM1 edit button
3-113
3.16.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM

The following description is an operation to change the base of EBL1/VRM1.
EBL2/VRM2 becomes a similar operation.
(1) Changing Dropped (the base position is floating).
1) When Base point button is displayed blank, left-click to this button.
Then, Base point button is changed to display D and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the cursor.
(2) Changing CCRP (the base position is ship-centered).
1) When Base point button is displayed D, left-click to this button.
Then, Base point button is changed to display blank and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the ship.
Lift-click to the Base point button
3-114
3.16.4 Marker Setting

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The Marker Setting panel opens.
1) Display Unit Simultaneity:

[VRM1 distance unit], [VRM2 distance unit] button of cursor synchronize when making [Display Unit
Simultaneity] valid.
Distance unit synchronize .
2)EBL/VRM Step :
See 3.15.1.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step
3) Cursor Read Out:
Latitude/Longitude: When [Latitude/Longitude] is selected, latitude and longitude is displayed in the
cursor information pop up.
Bearing/Range: When [Bearing/Range] is selected, bearing and range is displayed in the cursor
information pop up.
3-115
ECDIS
3.17 Running Fix

the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM.
This connection is kept regardless of the ships movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own
ship against the fixed position at all times.
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the context menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.
Fixed position
Your ship
Bearing
Position
Distance
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves,
the bearing and distance displayed change accordingly.
[Relation between your ships position and fixed position when the ship moves]
Fixed position
Your ship
The bearing and distance are displayed here.
To delete the running fix:

Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the context menu.
3-116
3.18 Monitoring Dragging Anchor

A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship
moves and part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a Dragging anchor alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at
which you left-click on the chart as the center.
Occurrence of Dragging anchor alarm
The dragging anchor monitoring circle

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The Monitoring Dragging Anchor panel opens.
By default, the heading forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking
on the chart can also set the position as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.
How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.
3-117
ECDIS
Dragging anchor alarm:

When the Alarm list panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Dragging anchor] Icon
blinks in red.
Red Icon: Dragging Anchor
3-118
3.19 User-Marking/Highlighting
can input the following marks on the chart.
Event Mark :
During voyage, you can put an Event Mark at the ship position.
Information Mark: You can put an Information Mark at any position.

Tidal Stream Mark: You can put an Tidal Mark at any position. The speed (knot) and time can be input.
Highlight:
You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.
ECDIS
Highlighing
Own ship
Tidal Stream Mark
Event Mark
Information Mark
3.19.1 Marking the Event Mark

(1) Event Marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an Event Mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
Left-click the [Event ].Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.
- To check the Information on the Event Mark ,see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the
Objects.
(2) Event Marking using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.
3-119
2) In the Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
Enter comment on the event.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Event Mark.
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Event Mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the Event Mark
Event Mark
[Apply] : It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.
(3) How to delete the Event Mark

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
The Delete Event Mark panel opens.
2) Left-click the [No.] you want and then left-click the [Delete].
The panel closes and the selected Event Mark is deleted from the chart
3) Left-click [Close] , Delete Event Mark panel is close.
3-120
3.19.2 Marking the Information Mark

You can put an Information Mark (
) at any point on the chart.

The Location/Attributes - Information panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Information panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter the comment on the Information Mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Information
Mark.
To edit the Information Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] .
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Information Mark (
) is put on the screen.
Position of the Information
Information Mark
[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.

For viewing the Information on the Information Mark or editing/deleting the Information Mark,
see 3.14Reading Out Information on the Objects.
3-121
ECDIS
3.19.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark

You can put a Tidal Stream Mark at any point on the chart. The Tidal Stream Mark has the bearing and
Stream speed in knot. You can edit them after putting the Tidal Stream Mark on the chart.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel, perform the following editing operation.
Set/Drift/Time setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
- Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time
Enter comment on the Tidal Stream Mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Tidal Stream
Mark.
To edit the Tidal Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Tidal Stream Mark is put on the screen.
Position of the Tidal Stream Mark
Time
Knot
Tidal Stream Mark

For viewing the Information on the Tidal Stream Mark or editing/deleting the Tidal Stream
Mark, see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the Objects.
3-122
3.19.4 Highlight
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to
make notations.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Highlight panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted.
Then, click on the
coordinates of a point which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter comment on the Highlight.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Highlight.
To edit the Highlight position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens. Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Highlight is put on the screen.
Diagram is canceled when doing the left double-click when creating two points.
Diagram is canceled when clicking the [OK] when creating two points.
Diagram is canceled when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when
creating two points.
Diagram is fixed when doing the left double-click when creating more than three points and
the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel closes.
Diagram is fixed when clicking the [OK] when creating more than three points and the panel
closes.
Diagram is fixed when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when creating
more than three points and the panel closes. Equal to or less than two point are canceled.
When doing the following operation without ever clicking [Apply], diagram is canceled and
transitions to each mode.
Chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Other Information] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Auto Mode] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Zoom Area] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1(or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1 (or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1 (or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [VRM1(or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Diagram is fixed when clicking [Apply] once and doing the following operation and transitions
to each mode.
3-123
ECDIS
Top of a highlighted area
Highlight

For viewing the information on the Highlight or editing/deleting the Highlight, see 3.14
Reading Out Information on the Object.
Note:
When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 Chart
Editing).
3-124
3.20 EBL Maneuver

Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain
conditions. By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be
used as a target when turning.
Supplemental line
Heading line
Planned route
REACH
Maneuver curve
WOL (Wheel Over Line)

WOL line
Own ship's position
WOL:
Wheel Over Line
Reach:
Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R:
Turning radius

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver ] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The EBL Maneuver Setting panel opens and cross cursor changes to the arrow(EBL) cursor.
3-125
ECDIS
2) Set or select each item.

Reach
Enter the Reach (m).

Setting range is 0-2000.
Turn Mode Left-click either Radius or Rate.

Radius: Enter the constant turn radius (NM)
Rate:
Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)
3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (Wheel Over Line) will change depending upon the Wheel Over Line of
the supplemental line.
4) Set the bearing of the supplemental line with [EBL] dial on the operation panel.
Moving the [EBL] dial to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The
position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.
5) Left-click on the chart.
The setting will be established.
Note:
Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as
that of your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.
To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) Remove EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The EBL Maneuver Setting panel closed.
3-126
3.21 Cross Bearing

This function displays cross bearings.
An angle for calculating the own ships position from the
reference point can be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has
encountered an error causing the own ships position to be obscure, the own ships position can be
obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed targets bearing on the chart using the cross bearing
function.
ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The Cross Bearingdialog box opens and the mouse cursor changes.
Reference coordinates of the cross bearing

line
Reciprocal bearing from the reference point
Bearing from the reference point
Length of the cross bearing line
Selection of bearing display on the chart
(True/Reverse)
2) Sets the reference point

By the trackball operation
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line,
and left-click.
Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and
Longitude fields in the [Cross Bearing] dialog box.

By the [Cross Bearing] panel operation
It inputs value to the [LAT] and [LON] numerical box.
3-127
3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the [EBL] dial or entering the reciprocal
bearing viewed from the reference point.
Bearing from the reference point is displayed in the 180 degree reciprocal bearing with typing in
value.
4) Determine the distance of the cross bearing line by turning the [VRM] dial or entering the
distance.
Setting range is 0.0NM - 99.9NM.
5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set], and the bearing is
displayed beside the cross bearing line.
6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [True] radio button or the [Reverse]
radio button.
[True] display
[Reverse] display
7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be
displayed at the same time.
8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].
9) To close theCross Bearing panel, left-click the [Close].
3-128
3.22 Inputting Clearing Lines

Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.
1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see3.16 Operating EBL/VRM), the start point and end point of
clearing lines should be determined from the base point and cross point of EBL/VRM, and then
the right button on the track ball should be clicked.
2)
In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] -[(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order..
menu to display Not Less Than and Not More Than, and left-click on either of them.
3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.
NLT:
Not Less Than

NLT116 means Not less than 116 (degree).
NMT: Not More Than

NMT152 means Not more than 152(degree).
For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.14
Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3-129
ECDIS
3.23 LOP(Line Of Position)

This function displays LOP. This function can correct the position of the ship by using the distance or
the angle from the reference point.
1) Display "Create LOP" panel
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
"Create LOP" panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
Latitude, Longitude:
The starting position of LOP is specified. Default is
own ship position of point that displays the dialog.
The specification of the value is a left-click on the chart
screen. Or, value is input left-clicking a column of
Latitude/Longitude.
Type:
Type of LOP is selected and the value is input.
Bearing Azimuth and distance are specified turns
the [EBL] dial and changes the value.
Range Distance is specified turns the VRM dial
and changes the value..
value is input left-clicking a column of Bearing/Range.
Time:
Time is specified. Default is time. Value is input
left-clicking a column of Time.
Set LOP:
LOP is fixed by set value. This button is invalid when LOP is over 3 lines.
Select Cross Point:
When two LOP (or TLP) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. Select
Cross Point panel is displayed when you left-click this button.
Create TPL (Transferred Line Of Position):
LOP being displayed now is made, and it moves parallel and TPL is made the ship
movement. see 3-120122 Example of ship position correction that uses TPL.
Close:
Close"Create LOP" panel.Made LOP doesn't disappear.
3-130
2) Delete LOP
Select [(7)Main]-[(4)LOP]-[(2)Delete All LOP]. Then All LOP line is deleted.
3) Select Cross Point
When two LOP (or TPL) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. Select Cross Point
panel is displayed when you left-click this button. When LOP ( or TPL) is set 3 lines and more,
information message is displayed and cross point is displayed by select 2 lines.
Latitude, Longuitude:
Display the position cross point.
When there are two points or more, left-click
the position list and select crossed LOP point.
Reference Point
Adjust own ships position to selected cross
point.
Close
Close Select Cross Point panel.
3-131
ECDIS
1. Select Cross Point by 2lines LOP

Displayed Select Cross Point panel and marked
Cross Point chosen LOP becomes a red line
Adjusted own ship's position
3-132
2. Select Cross Point by 3lines LOP

Displayed information message
Click [OK] button

ECDIS
Displayed Select Cross Point panel

and no marked Cross Point
Marked Cross Point chosen LOP red line.
Select 2 lines
Adjusted own ship's position
3-133
4) Create TPL (Transferred Position Line)

After the own ship adjusts by Cross Point, TPL can be displayed according to the progress of
the ship.
Example of ship position correction that uses TPL:
1. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured, and LOP is set.
Moreover, the distance to the ship and the target is measured, and LOP is set.
Two LOP is set.

2. Select "Select Cross Point" button to display the cross point.
Displaying the cross point.

3. Select "Reference Point" button to adjust the position of the ship. (Temporary Position)
Adjusting the position of the ship.
3-134
4. The ship is at some time.
ECDIS
5. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured again, and the third
LOP is set.
Third LOP is set.

6. Select [Create TPL] . Then, TPL is displayed according to the progress of the ship.
Displaying TPL
3-135
7. Select "Select Cross Point" . And, set the cross point of TPL and the third LOP.
Information message displayed when there are three LOP or more.

Select [OK] .
Select the third LOP and TPL.
Displaying cross point.

8. [Reference Point] button is selected, and the position of the ship is adjusted.
Adjusting the position of the ship.
3-136
Note:
When the own ship is adjusted by LOP, the operation is recorded in Logbook. When
"Event-Reference Point" is selected from the list and [View REF Point] button is pushed, the
[Information] panel is displayed. The [Information] panel displays [Information] of associated LOP.
Select [MENU] [(7)Main] [(7)Logbook] in that order.
ECDIS
Select Event-Reference Point and left-click [View REF Point]
3-137
3.24 Acquisition Zone

Acquisition Zone is used to automatically monitor AIS target in vicinity of own ship.
When AIS target enters Acquisition Zone, status of AIS is automatically changed to Activate state.
1)In the MENU
Select [MENU] [(7)Main] [(1)Make AZ] in that order
When [AZ Function] of Make AZ panel is valid., Acquisition Zone 1(or 2) is displayed on the chart
screen. When [AZ Function] of Make AZ panel is invalid, Acquisition Zone 1(or 2) is disappeared.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the Acquisition Zone line.
Acquisition Zone 1
Setting of Acquisition Zone 1 is changed
AZ Function
Display of Acquisition Zone 1 is switched
ON Acquisition Zone 1 is displayed
OFFAcquisition Zone 1 is disappeared
Make AZ 1
AZ Function is valid after fixing the input.
[Start Side], [End Side], [Far Edge, Width]
Display setting of Acquisition
(Refer to figure below)
Setting is changed by [Make AZ] 1 is
clicked
Acquisition Zone 2 setting area
Item is the same as Acquisition Zone 1.
Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area
Close Make AZ panel is closed
Acquisition Zone 2 Setting area
Start Side
End Side
Far Edge
Width
3-138
2) Change setting method of Acquisition Zone

The procedure for changing the setting is shown about the range of the area of Acquisition
Zone.
Change setting method of Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area *the procedure is same as for Acquisition
Zone 2 Setting area.
1. Select [Make AZ 1] button. Then [Make AZ 1] button is changed color.
ECDIS
2. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "Start Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Far Edge" is changed.
Start Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the
operation panel.
Setting range is 000.0 359.9.
Far Edge
Change by [VRM] Dial of the
operation panel.
Width is not change.
Setting range is 0.50NM
31.50NM.
3. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.
4. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "End Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Width" is changed.
End Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the operation
panel.
Setting range is 000.0- 359.9.
Width
Change by [VRM] Dial of the operation
panel.
Value of Far Edge changes according
to changing Width.
Setting range is 0.50NM - 31.50NM.
5. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.

The display of "Make AZ 1" returns to the origin, and "AZ Function of Acquisition Zone 1" is valid.
3-139
3.25 Multi Window

3.25.1 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the analog meter panelon the display panel. You can see the HDG,
COG, set/Drift, CTS on the analog meter panel. Also, you can select the Display Panel Setting
panel to be displayed on the analog meter panel.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] - [(2) Analog Meter panel] in that order.
The following analog meter panel is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COG) are represented by the
indicators of the analog meter panel. The color of the item and that of the indicator match
each other. So, you can easily identify each indicator from the color.
The white arrow corresponds to the white

triangle.
(Color matches each other in it supports items)
Ships heading.
Log speed (speed through water)
Course and speed (The vector of the vessels motion over

the ground and the course of the route selected)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.
Current direction calculated by the difference between the
COG and HDG vector.
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG
and HDG vector.
Set /Drift(Blue arrow)
HDIG (Gray arrow)
COG (Gray arrow)
CTS (Red arrow)
3-140
To the close the analong mater panel:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8)Multi Window]-[(2)Analog meter] in that order.
Then, the Display Panel Setting panel is closed.
Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter panel:

ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(7) Display Panel Setting] in that order.
Then, the Display Panel Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and left-click the [OK] button. It reflects
setting and it closes a panel.
It cancels setting and it closes a panel when clicking [Cancel] button.
CTS label, CTS value are displayed in the display panel when making valid.
Depth label, Depth sensor name, Depth value are displayed in the display
panel when making valid.
HDG is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.
COG is displayed at the Ana log meter panel when making valid.
Set / Drift is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.
CTS is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.
Triangle is displayed in the left side of each of HDG, COG, Set, CTS of the
display panel.
3.25.2 Other Multi Window display

The window of the following contents can be displayed at the thing except the analog meter.
Because the contents which can be displayed by the establishment environment are different, for the
details, refer to the instruction manual of each of the facilities.
1) To open multi window
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to display more than the
menu, the supporting menu has a check mark and the panel is displayed.
3-141
The menu where a window is displayed:

(2)Analog Meter (See3.25.1 )
(3)Climate
(4)Draft
(5)Current Wind
(6)Gyro Rudder Graph
(7)Course Bar
(8)Ship
(9)Engine Graph
(1)Depth Graph
(2)Current
2) To close multi window
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to close more than the
menu, the supporting menu disappears a check mark and a panel is close.
3) Preset the multi window display condition
The condition of the multi window can be saved and preseted. (either valid or invalid, and the
position to display, and so on )
Save the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(7) PreSet Save] in that order.
It maintains the display condition and the display position of the present multi window. When
doing the same operation once again from the menu, the display condition and the display
position maintain new one.
Preset the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(1) PreSet] in that order.
It presets the display condition and the display position of the multi window to have maintained.
4) Setting to the multi window display
It changes the setting of each multi window. for the details of the setting, refer to the instruction
manual of each of the facilities.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(0) Setup] in that order.
3-142
3.26 Cursor Auto Mode

The auto mode is the mode that the display of the contents and the change of the setting can be
implemented by repeating a cursor in the specific object and the line.
The cursor becomes a crosshair cursor.
Navigation & Planning The initial condition in case of start-up becomes an auto mode about the sailing
executive-state.
When choosing [AUTO mode] from the context menu when a cursor is displayed at the thing except the
crosshair cursor in [Zoom Area] etc, the cursor mode changes to the auto mode.
Also, it returns to the auto mode automatically when not clicking for 1 minute when a cursor is displayed
at the thing except the crosshair cursor and leaving.
The selectable object and the displayed information
When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1
Object
Operation which is
Information which is displayed
possible when
when adjusting a cursor
left-clicking
1
AIS
AIS
Non-active: actived AIS target.
Ships name(number)
Active:Select List display and
CPA
being hidden.
TCPA
2
TT
TT
Select List display and being
Target number
hidden.
CPA
TCPA
3
BUOY
LIGHT
BUOY
Comment
LIGHT
Comment
Cross point of EBL1 or
EBL1(EBL2)
Changing the EBL1(EBL2) or
VRM1
VRM1(VRM2)
VRM1
(EBL1 or VRM1)
(VRM2);1-step operation.
EBL1(EBL2)
EBL1(EBL2)
Changing the EBL1(EBL2)
VRM1(VRM2)
VRM1(VRM2)
Changing the VRM1(VRM2)
AZ1(AZ2)
AZ1(AZ2)
Changing the AZ1(AZ2)

The item to change by the place to
click is different.
Start Side
End Side
Far Side
Width
3-143
ECDIS
The selectable object and the displayed information --continued-When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1
Object
Operation which is
Information which is displayed
possible when
when adjusting a cursor
left-clicking
9
User Map Object
MAP
(Symbol/Line/Area/Text)
Comment
Event Mark
EVENT
Comment
Information Mark
INFO
Comment
Tidal Stream Mark
TIDE
Comment
Highlight
HIGHLIGHT
Comment
10
AIS Ring filter

AIS Sector filter
AIS
Changing to the value AIS Ring
Ring
filter.
AIS
Changing to the value AIS Sector
Sector
filter.
*1 Operation is done about the object with the priority which is high when adjusting a cursor when an
object overlaps and is displayed
3-144
3.27 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the
items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook Settingpanel . How to display the
logbook and how to select the items to be saved are explained here.
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook

The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.27.2 Logbook
Setting .
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(7) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No.
Date
Time
Event (kind of alarm, Event Mark Navtex, etc. -- depends on the
Logbook setting panel settings.),
POSN1
POSN2
Latitude
Longitude
COG
SOG
HDG
STW
Av. Speed 4h
Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours)
Voyage DIST. (G )
Voyage DIST. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water))
Charts
Set
Drift
Wind Dir. (direction)
Wind Speed
Wave Dir. (direction)
Wave Height
Air Press (pressure)
Air Temperature.
Water Temperature.
Engine Rev. (revolution)
Comments
3-145
ECDIS
Note:
The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 7.9 Clear Voyage Distance.)
The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse
format.
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.
3-146
Button Operation (left-click the button):

[Filter]:
The Logbook Setting panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For
logbook option settings, see the next 3.26.2 Logbook Setting.
[Column Setting]:
You can select any item in the list. Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark () shows that the selected item is set to ON. Selected
column and [Up] or [Down], The column changes the order in table of
Logbook panel
Column list is as follows:
Date
Time
Event
POSN1
POSN2
Latitude
Longitude
COG()
SOG(kn)
Heading()
Log(kn)
Av. Speed 4h(kn)
Av. Speed 24h(kn)
Voyage DIST.(G)(NM)
Voyage DIST.(W)(NM)
Charts, Set(), Drift(kn)
Wind Dir. ()
Wind Speed(m/sec)
Wave Dir. (kn)
Wave Height(m)
Air Press Temp.(hPa)
Temp(), Water Temp.()
Engine Rev.(rpm)
Comments
Wave Height(m)
Air Press .(hPa)
Air Temperature ()
Water Temperature.()
Engine Rev.(rpm)
Comment
Following column can not move:
Date
Time
[OK] : It saves setting contents.
[Cancel] : It cancels setting contents.
3-147
ECDIS
[View Navtex]:
Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex" , and then left-click to open
the Letter panel that shows the detailed information on the Navtex
messages.
You can mark it if you select [Marking on the Chart]. You can set expiration
date then. When [Expire Date] is off, a marking is deleted after the reception
15 days later.
It changes to the data which the information on the "Letter" panel selected
when selecting another Navtex in "Logbook" panel as it opened a panel
and clicking
[Letter].
[Marking on the Chart]: It displays Navtex symbol on the chart when making valid.
[Expire Date]:
[Expire Date] entry field and the note become valid when making valid.
Navtex symbol becomes hidden when passing an [Expire Date]
In case of invalid, the symbol becomes hidden when passing on the 15
days from the date of receive.
In the date of reception, the date in front can not be entered.
Also, more than 15 days after date, too, can not be entered from the date
of reception.
[Edit]:
Navtex "Location" panel is displayed.
[Print]:
When setting a printer, the Navtex information can be printed.
[Close]:
Letter panel is closes.
[View REF Point]:
Left-click the log that is including Event-Reference Point , and then

left-click this button to open the Information panel that shows the
detailed information on the Reference Point messages.The following
contents are displayed when selecting Event-Reference Point and
clicking
[View REF Point].

LAT
LON
Min Scale
Max Scale
Plot Type
Source
Time
Comment
3-148
The following contents are displayed when there is LOP cross point information.
LOP1(or LOP2)
Latitude
Longitude
BRG()
RNG(NM)
Data
TPL(Yes / No)
The panel closes when clicking [Close] .
[Delete Navtex]:
ECDIS
Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex", and then left-click this
button to open the Delete panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes
Navtex.
Selected Message: When the [OK] is left-clicked, the selected log No. in the
Logbook panel is deleted.
Before:
Enter the [date/time] you want delete the Navtex messages

before the entered [date/time].
When the [OK] is left-clicked, the Navtex messages before the
set [date/time] are deleted.
All Message:
When the [OK] is left-clicked, All Message in the Logbook

panel is deleted.
[Export]:
Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a
spreadsheet program and edited with a personal computer. Select one of the
following items in the Export panel:
Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.
From/To:
Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.
The Save As panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] in the
Export panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] column, select
the folder in which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] .
3-149
For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 10.5 Data Formats
of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.
[Cancel]:
[Save As] panel closes without changing setting.
[Jump]:
Left-click the record data, and then left-click this . Then, the position of recorded
data is displayed at the center of the screen.
[Print]:
The Print panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the
printing conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
From/To:
The data in the date range entered in the input box will be
printed. (The item which is printed is decided.)
[Print] panel closes when clicking [Cancel] .
3-150
[Input]:
You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the
[OK] is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the Logbook panel. (The
No. in this panel corresponds to the No. in the Logbook panel.)
ECDIS
When clicking [Cancel], input value are canceled and the Input panel closes.
[Close]:
Closes the panel.
3-151
3.27.2 Logbook Setting

You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger
conditions to save the log data which will only be used to display in the Logbook panel explained in
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook .
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(5) Logbook Setting] in that order.
The Logbook Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the Logging and View panels, and left-click
the [OK] .
Note:
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.
Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the Logging area.
Also, log data will be saved for displaying in the Logbook panel,
For example, if you left-click and select At Noon. The log data is saved At noon.
Contents of the logbook items are as follows:
At Noon:
Data will be saved at
12:00 (LTM) when this
item is valid.
Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after
set duration of time.
Route Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to Route Monitoring
Alarm.
Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to Safety counter
Alarm Dangerous
Alarm LAT.Limit Over
Alarm Chart Alarm
Area Alarm,
Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
When press
Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.

AUTO Sail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to Alarm System States tab.
3-152
Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Startup, Offset Reference Point,etc)
occurs.
Latest display days:
It displays of the number of days of setting,setting log days.
[Navtex Setting]:
The Navtex Setting panel opens.
Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the Station,
Month/Year and Message area. Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected Station will be filtered by the condition set
by the Month/Year and Message, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for
displaying on the chart.
The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to
the Navtex information.
Station:
You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name.
For example, if you select the letter A, the station name that begins with A
will be accepted. If you do not select Filtering, Messages of all the stations
will be not accepted
Month/Year:
You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
Message:
You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message.
If you do not select Filtering, the navigational warnings will be not accepted.
Note:
The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.
The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual
3-153
ECDIS
3.28 Own Ships Setting

The following settings on own ship are explained here.
Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
Vector display and heading line at the primary position
Danger detection vector and sector
Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.
COG vector
HDG vector
Danger detection sector
Danger detection vector

Own ship
Heading line
Own ship
Beam line
Tracking past position dots
Time labels
Tracking period
[Own Ships Setting Items]

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
3-154
3.28.1 Own Ship Symbol

You can select your ships shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.
Width of ship according to scale
Length of ship according to scale
(a)
(b)
[Your Ship Symbol]

2) In the Own Ship Symbol area, left-click either Symbol (a) or Out Line (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Ships Name: Own ship name can be set.

Receive value is displayed when receiving from AIS.
3-155
ECDIS
3.28.2 Vector Display at POSN1

The COG vector (vector of the vessels motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessels
motion through the water) can be displayed for your ships symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ships current speed in
minutes. For example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, the tip of the vector is the expected
position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current speed.
Vector length
Vector length
Vector time mark
Vector time mark
HDG vector
COG vector
[Vector Display and Heading line]

2) Set each item on the Vector area.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the [Display Ground-Referenced Velocity] on the
[Display Ground-Water-Referenced Velocity]. Then, left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship
Setting panel. Then, the panel will close.
Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.
Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.
COG/HDG vector time until the ship reaches
the expected position. (Min.1min,Max. 60 min.)
Turns ON/OFF the Vector Time Mark display.

(Min.1min,Max.6min)
3-156
3.28.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector

You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be
set the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the
sector can be set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is
shown in the rectangular shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails
at the current speed. The sector and its radius can be set as required.
Danger Detection Sector radius

(1.0min to 30.0min
or 0.1NM to 5.0NM)
Danger Detection Sector angle

(0.0deg to 359.9deg)
Danger Detection Vector length

(1.0min to 30.0min
or 0.1NM to 5.0NM)
Danger Detection Vector width

(30m to 250m)
[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]

2) Left-click each item on the Danger Detection panel.
Danger detection vector display ON/OFF
Danger detection sector display ON/OFF
[When left-clicking,the[Alarm Limit Setting]

panel opens].
3-157
ECDIS
3) Left-click the [Set Alarm Limit] , the Alarm Limit Option panel opens.
Vector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
vector.
Length:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
NM / min:
Change to unit of Length.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Width:
Set 30.0 to 250.0m.
Sector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
sector.
NM / min :
Change to unit of Radius.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Radius:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
Width:
Set 0.0 to 359.9deg.
4) Left-click the [Vector] and [Sector] and enter the value
Vector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [length] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.
Sector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [radius] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.
5) Left-click the [OK] on the Alarm Limit Setting panel, and then the [OK] on the Own Ship
Setting panel to close all panels,setting becomes valid.
3-158
3.28.4 Track and Time Label Display

The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of
information is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:
Own ship (Primary position)
Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.
ECDIS
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
Tracking past position dots

(Every 3sec to 60min
or every 0.1NM to 10NM)
[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

2) In the "Track" area, left-click [Display Past Track] and [Display Time Label] to select them.
3) It enters value with the following item.[color][Track Period][Past POSN][Interval].
Then, left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship Setting panel to close it.
Color of ships track (Red, Green, Blue,

Magenta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24 hour
OFF.
3, 5, 10, 30 sec.
1, 3, 5, 10,30,60 min.
0.1,0.2,0.3,0.5,1,3,5,10 NM
10, 30, 60 min.
3-159
3.28.5 Heading Line and Beam Line

You can set the Heading Line and Beam Line for display ships direction.
2) Left-click the item to select it.
Heading line
Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
Heading line
Beam line
When [Display Heading Line] is ON setting, Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
Heading Line and Beam line
3) Left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.
3-160
3.29 Chart Setting

You can set the various Chart Settings.
3.29.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
ECDIS
The Chart Setting panel opens. This panel consists of three tabs View Common, View1
and View2, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.
[View Common tab]
Note:
You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] tab is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] tab is selected from the Table Editing
menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.
3-161
3.29.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab

The settings made here apply to View1 and View2 tabs for single/multi-view.
1) Left-click the item to Select.[OK] on the panel to close it.
a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [Base], [Standard] and [Other] on the display panel are
used. For detailed function, see 3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only).
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)
Boundary of the area
Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized
line)
Boundary of the area
3-162
c) Redraw
Border range:
Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective
only when motion True is selected.) Border range can set from 30%
to 80%.
Margin (Chart Rotation):
This function is effective only when the mode Course up is

selected. (See 3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode.)
The chart
will be turned step-by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if

the [Margin (Chart Rotation)] is set to 10 degrees, the chart
will be rotated each time the ship turns more than 10 degrees.
[Ex. The boarder range feature]
When set border range is 80%, When your ship reaches the border range,
the chart automatically shifts as follow:
3-163
ECDIS
d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)

Paper Chart:
Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper

charts.
Simplified:
Simplified: A simple-ized symbol is displayed.
Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the [Full Light
Line] is set to ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart
scale. When the chart is enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the
minimum scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also,
note that this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains
no information.
[When [Paper Chart]is selected]

marks displayed on Electronic
Chart Display indicate that there are
rocks or other dangerous obstacles
in the water area where the vessel is
sailing.
Display of
marks depends on
the settings of Depth Alarm. For the

method of setting Depth Alarm, see
e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only).
[When [Simplified] is selected]
3-164
[Full Light Line setting]

When [Full Light Line] is OFF
ECDIS
Range of lighthouse light
When [Full Light Line] is ON
Range of lighthouse light

The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.
3-165
[Consider Scale Minimum setting]

When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is ON
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is OFF
3-166
e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)

Shallow Contour:
The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
Safety Contour:
Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed
enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line
than you set is displayed.
Safety Depth:
Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced
displayed only at the value.
Deep Contour:
ECDIS
The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
Two Color Depth:
Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into
four colors. However, when [Two Color Depth] is selected, the sea
depths are displayed in two colors, with Line of "Shallow Contour" and
"Safety Contour" displayed as one color, and
and Line of "Deep
Contour" displayed as another color.("Safety Depth" is displayed at the

value). This feature is used to clearly indicate and divide the sea into
safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be taken during the
voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
Shallow Pattern:
The [Shallow Pattern] check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at
Shallow Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This
function is for highlighting areas that require special care during the
voyage.
Show Isolated Danger In Shallow WaterWhenShow Isolated Danger In Shallow Water

is selected, display isolated danger in shallower water than safety
contour as mark .
Value:
Min:0m
Max:200m
[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]

Shallow Contour
Deep Contour
Land
Land
shallow water
safety water
deep water
Safety Contour
3-167
[Two Color Depth setting]

When [Two Color Depth] is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)
Deep Contour
Shallow Contour
Land
Safety Depth(only the value)
Safety Contour
When [Two Color Depth] is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)
3-168
[Shallow Pattern setting]

When [Shallow Pattern] is ON (Shallow Pattern is displayed.)
Shallow Pattern
ECDIS
When [Shallow Pattern] is OFF (Shallow Pattern disappears.)
3-169
Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Pattern

When Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Patternis ON (Isolated Danger
in shallower water than safety contour display as mark
Dangerous object
Safety Contour
When Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Patternis OFF (Isolated Danger
in shallower water than safety contour does not display as mark
Dangerous object
Safety Contour
f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database

The chart that C-MAP Ed 3 was imported can be chosen from.
The list of the C-MAP Ed.3 chart which
was imported in Chart Portfolio is
displayed.
When setting a truns ON/OFF in the

validity, a chart is displayed.
When choosing more than one, it rises
one above another and it is displayed.
3-170
g) Chart Graphic Performance
FastPriority is given to drawing Speed.

Hi QualityPriority is given to drawing Accuracy.
ECDIS
3-171
3.29.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab

The View1 tab setting is used for the [View 1] screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single
view screen (normal screen), or the "View 1" screen when you select multi view function to display
"View 1" and "View 2" screens. (For multi view function, see 3.11 Displaying Chart in Various
Ways (Multi View/Wide View).)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON /OFF.
Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
[Cancel]: It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]:
Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply]
[View1 tab]
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for
the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 Multi View Screen)
Single view
Top Bottom view
Right Left view
3-172
Right Top view
a) Type (Type of chart)

S-57:
S-57 chart is displayed.
C-MAP Ed.2: S-57 can be selected for simultaneous display.

C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
ARCS:
ARCS chart is displayed.
Note:
ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the [ARCS
PIN] is correctly inputted when the "Navigation & Planning" is started.
ECDIS
ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.
b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)
Expands characters.
Reduces characters.
The character size in the text to which the
mark is attached can be changed.
Example: Land region
Small
Large
Small
Large
Large
Small
Smalld
Large
Large
Small
Large
Small
3-173
c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)

Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.
[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Base], [Standard], and [Other]
mode
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Standard] or [Other] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Other] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Display of each layer listed below can be turned ON/OFF:
Layers in S-57
[S] objects:
unknown object
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
topmarks
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data,Low accuracy data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
3-174
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate

Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
Continental shelf area
ECDIS
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area

Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Layers in C-MAP Ed.3
[S] objects:
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
3-175
Navigational system mark

Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data,Low accuracy data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts
ON and OFF.
Text in S-57
Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
National language
3-176
Text in C-MAP Ed.3

Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Other text (Name of building so on)
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Geographic names
National language
Note: When setting "National Language" in the validity, it overlap with the other displaying
information specified in English. Therefore, when setting "National Language" in the validity, set
the other Text check item in the invalid resemblance.
3-177
ECDIS
3.29.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab

The [View2] tab setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen
(the second screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen
will not be displayed if you use a Single View screen (normal screen). (For multi view function,
see 3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View) .
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.
Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
[Cancel]:
It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]:
Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply].
The setting contents are the same as for [View 1] panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:
Type (Type of chart)
Layer
Text
Text Size
Note:
[View2-Type] doesn't change with [View1-Type] and it functions.
3-178
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area
for the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 Multi View Screen)
ECDIS
Single view
Top Bottom view
Right Left view Right Top view
3.29.2 Other Chart Setting

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The Other Chart Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.
The item which removed a check become hidden.
3-179
3.29.3 Save Chart Setting

This function can save the setting contents of [Chart Setting].
1. In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(3) Save Chart Setting].
2. [Save Chart Setting] panel is displayed.
Name can be entered to 15 characters.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
the saving setting can be loaded.
see 3.29.4 Chart Setting List.
The following set value is saved.

[View Common] tab
Display Category
Area Boundary
Depth Alarm
Redraw
Chart Symbol
[View1/View2] tab
Type
Text Size
Layer
Text
3-180
3.29.4 Chart Setting List

This feature can load the set value which saved in[Menu]-[(6)Chart]-[(0)Setting]-[(1)S-57/C-MAP/ARCS].
1. In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
2. Chart panel and a saving setting list are displayed.
[Load]:
Selected setting can be loaded.
[Delete]:
Selected setting can be deleted.
[Close]:
[Chart Setting List] is closes.
ECDIS
3-181
3.30 Chart Abbreviations

Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An Information panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.
3-182
3.31 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart

You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart
here in "Navigation & Planning" screen or you merge it when importing with the "Chart Portfolio" is
selectable in the setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see attached Chart Portfolio.
1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [Standard] or [Other].( A part is displayed in
[Base].)
ECDIS
[Standard] or [Other] is selected.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order. I
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The Accept Updates panel opens.
3-183
3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.

If you want to display and check the updating objects, select chart to left-click the [Show].
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.
Accept updating objects
by left-clicking the [OK]
on the Accept
Updatespanel.
Updating objects will be

displayed in red.
The updating objects are merged

with the original chart and its color is
changed from red to normal one.
4) Left-click the [OK] .

The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.
3-184
3.32 Graphical Index

Graphical Index is a function to display the index of SENC stored by the system.
Select [MENU] and then [(6) Chart] [(7) Graphical Index] in that order.
Then chart index is displayed on the chart and Graphical Index panel is displayed.
2) Left-click on the chart, the "Graphical Index Information"panel of the clicked place is displayed.
ECDIS
Graphical Index
"Graphical Index Information"panel of
the clicked place
3-185
3) To want to change display function, select turns ON/OFF and select [Apply].
Display ENC Data:
Switch Display ENC Data in Graphical Index.
Display Chart Name:
Switch Display the Chart Name. If this function is
effective, Chart Name is displayed upper right in
the chart index.
Chart Boundary:
Select display index in either resolution level.
The boundary of the chart to have made valid is
displayed.
Overview
Low Resolution
General
Coastal
Approach
Harbour
Berthing
High Resolition
2) To ending graphical index mode, Left-click on the [Close]. Then, the chart display returns to
original condition.
3-186
3.33 Date-dependant View

Date-dependant View is a function to display S57/63 chart at the time of specified date. For example,
you can display chart of arrival area depended on ETA when planning voyage,
Select [MENU]-[(6)Chart]-[(9)Date-dependant View] in that order.
Date-dependent View Setting panel opens.
ECDIS
2) Enter the date/time you want to display S57/63 charts. And Left-click the Apply button.
UTC/LMT
Change UTC/LMT of specified date.
Data
Enter the date you want to see the chart.
Time
Enter the time you want to see the chart.
TimeZone (only LMT)
Enter the time zone you want to see the chart.
3) The chart is displayed based on entered date/time.
3) If Left-click "Apply" button and close panel, the chart is displayed based on now time.
3-187
3.34 Setting Radar Options

3.34.1 Setting of RADAR
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the TUser Chart Editing menu
The Radar Option panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
The Rader Option panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.
IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals from
other radars when they are superimposed over the
selected radar signal.
Gain Adjust/Sea Adjust/Rain Adjust/Video

You can adjust these items using the dials on the operation
panel other than using the dialog box
To Adjust the Radar Image Using the Radar Option Panel:

1)
Select value with the scroll bar.
2)
Left-click the [Close] button to close the Radar Option

panel.
3-188
3.35 AIS/TT Setting

3.35.1 AIS/Target Track Setting
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
The AIS/Tracking Target Setting Option panel opens.
ECDIS
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for TT/AIS to be used.
AIS/TT Past Position:
CPA/TCPA Limit:
AIS/TT past position can be displayed
It becomes valid when setting [AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm] to
in the set interval.
[ACT]. Alarm is occurred when the target enters in each
[0.5min] [1min] [2min] [3min] [4min]

[0.1NM] [0.2NM] [0.5NM] [1NM]: It
setting range.
CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is distance between
displays in the set interval.
own ship and target. CPA Limit setting range: 0.1 - 9.9NM
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) is time to own
ship and CPA of target. TCPA Limit setting range: 1
Display TT Vector:
99min
It displays TT Vector
when putting check.
AIS Lost Alarm

[OFF]: "Lost Alarm" not effect
[ACT&Danger]:
Active target and Danger target
[Danger]:
Danger target only
AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm:

[ACT]: Active target only
[ACT & Sleep]:
Active target and Sleep target
AIS Filter:
Target Number:
Refer to 3) AIS Filter
<AIS>
[OFF]:
Label is not displayed
[ON]:
Display only label of Activated AIS Target
[AIS Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed

[ships Name]:AIS Target name is display
<TT>
[OFF]:
Label is not displayed
[ON]:
Displays a label.
[TT Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed

3-189
Note:
Tracking spots of AIS/TT are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.
* In case of built-in Target Track processing co-processor.

Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes able to be selected when making [Internal Target
Tracking function] ON.
Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes invalid when making [Internal Target Tracking
function] ON.
3) AIS Filter
High Priority filter for display:
Ring:
The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.

It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Ring" line.
Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are
displayed.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Sector" line.
Heading line
Sector area
Ring area
Own ship
120nm
Note:
Maximum number of visible targets are 300. For over 300 targets, at first the targets
attributed danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are
shown the nearest from own ship one by one.
3-190
It sets the range of Ring.
It sets the range of Sector.
Minimum: 0.0 NM
Minimum: 0.0
Maximum: 120.0 NM(MAX)
Maximum: 359.9
It becomes valid when check is ON.
It becomes valid when check is ON.
Filter Mode:
[OFF]:
Regardless of the setting range,

AIS Target is displayed.
[Display]: Only AIS in the setting range is

displayed.
[Priority]: When AIS Target is displayed
above the maximum, AIS Target
which is the farthest from the
own ship is not displayed in turn.
Range which was set in Ring and Sector is
displayed when putting a check.
The priority of display is as follows when AIS Target is more than maximum.
Numerical display Target
CPA/TCPA Target
Target in AZ
Association Target
Activated Target
In CPA Limit setting range 1.TCPA sequence 2.CPA sequence 3.Number sequence
Out of CPA Limit setting range 1.Range sequence 2.Number sequence
3-191
ECDIS
TT symbols:
Item
Symbol
Color
Tracked target
(Selectable)
Dangerous target
Red (blink)
Object: (Selectable)
Lost target
Cross Line: Red (blink)

(Selectable)
Initial acquisition mark
AIS symbols:
Item
Symbol
Color
Sleeping target
(Selectable)
Activated target
(Selectable)
Selected target
(Selectable)
Dangerous target
Red (blink)
Object: (Selectable)
Lost target
Cross Line: Red (blink)
COG (variable length)

ROT (fixed length)
HDG (fixed length)
HDG
[Sleeping target]
[Activated target]
3-192
Conditions for AIS lost targets:

When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is
considered to be lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost
varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.
[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)
Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the moored
18 min
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the moored
60 sec
Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots
60 sec
Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots and it is now changing the course
60 sec
36 sec
Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots and it is now changing the course
36 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more
30 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course
30 sec
[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)

Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 2 knots
18 min
180 sec
180 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more
180 sec
When an AIS dangerous target is lost and the target data cannot be received for 1 minute, the
target and target data are deleted.
Dangerous Target cam be showed ,only when ARPA is received.
3-193
ECDIS
3.35.2 Association Setting

When the ship that transmits AIS information is displayed with the AIS device,
both of the TT symbol received AIS target symbol and radar are plotted. Setting for ECDIS to treat as the
same target is set on this "Association Setting"panel because information on originally the same ship is
shown.
Association Setting to the Association

target on the chart.
Association symbol

Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
The Association Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. To close the panel, Left-click the [OK] on the panel.
3-194
Association Target can be set in valid or invalid.

It becomes valid when putting a check.
It is connected with the [Association] of the display
panel.
[Synchronized with TTD] is valid only the AIS data
receive from the Radar
ECDIS
It preference which of AIS or TT and it can be set.
It sets [Bearing][Range][Course][Speed].
The setting range is as the following:

[Bearing]: 0.0- 9.9
[Range]: 0m - 999m
[Course]: 0- 99
[Speed]: 0kn - 99kn
Association is valid to 125 % of the set value.
3.36 Shifting Own Ship Position

During voyage, you can shift own ships position on the chart using one of the following methods:
Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor(Select to [Cursor])
Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude(Select to [Cursor])
Shifts by entering the offset value (Select to [Enter Offset])
Shifted own ship
When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the
position after the offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.
3-195
Please set the following items:
Position to display the reference point:

The position can be modified by left-clicking the select each column of [LAT] or [LON].
MIN Scale:
MAX Scale:
Sets the minimum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Sets the maximum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Comment: Comments for a reference point mark

can be input.
OK: Reference Point Mark will be displayed in the
specified location, and close this panel.
Cancel: Reference Point Mark will be not displayed.
Apply: Reference Point Mark will be displayed in
the specified location, and keep this panel
displayed.
Plot Type: Select EP/DR.

Source:
Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed
for Reference Point Mark.
Delete: Delete in selected
Reference Point
GPS/DGPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Astronomical/MFDF/Transit/GNSS/
Line of Position/Visual Bearing LOPS/Visual Range LOPS
Mark
Time: Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.
Reference Point Mark
Type of reference positioning
For viewing the information on"Reference Point Mark" or editing/deleting "Reference Point Mark",
see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the Objects.
3-196
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship
position, the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the
real one, and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position
panel on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position
Shift alarm is displayed in the message display area. Check these
indications, and cancel the offset function if necessary.
3.36.1 Shifting Using the Cursor

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The Confirmation panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] .

appears.
The ship offset cursor
3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position
you want, and then left-click there.
4) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is
displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.
Clear Offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order
3-197
ECDIS
3.36.2 Shifting by Entering the Position

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] .

3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift to that position.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel] .
To clear the offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
3.36.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value

Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The Enter Offset panel opens.
2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] .

3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel].
3.36.4 Canceling the Ship Offset

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position
display on the panel changes from sky blue to gray.
3-198
3.37 Printing Display

(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or
panels displayed on the screen.
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(5) Print ] in that order.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
The Print panel opens.
2) According to following figures, select the printer, and set for printing and left-click the [OK] on
the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.
HP Officejet K5400dn
HP Officejet 8000
HP Officejet 8100
3-199
3.38 Saving the Screen

An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
* When the Lost target, Danger TT Target, Danger AIS Target is in the blink condition, it isn't
captured.
* Radar echo is captured in the contained condition.
Drive_YY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp
Year
Minute
Date
Month
Hour
Second
(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2008, If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6
June
2008,it preserves at the E drive. the file name would beE_080606105015.bmp
3.39 Displaying the Startup Menu

(Exit the navigation & Planning)
After the Navigation & Planning is exited, the Startup Menu panel will be displayed.
For the Startup Menu panel, see 3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu.
Select [MENU][(0) Exit]in that order.
The Confirmation panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] .
Navigation & Planning is exited, and the Startup Menu will be displayed.
3-200
Route
Planning
4-1
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during
voyage is explained in 4.2.
For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.12 Selecting ROUTE and To WPT.
To set route options, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
Note:
If you make a Track line more than limit longitude distance, track line can not displayed and Not
Allowed message is indicated.
If you make a Track line more than 80 degree latitude distance, track line can not displayed
4.1 Route Planning

You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it.
Edition is possible by using either method.
Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WPT value in the WPT entry table. Using the [View Sync]
button, the current WPT can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WPT on the chart.
Editing Screen and Editing Menu:

When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing
screen is displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it
opens by rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the same way as for normal
menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly
different from those of menus.
Note:
The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.
Route Name and Extension of File:

Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as . and that cannot generally be used in file names cannot
be used as route names.
Extension of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as
follows.
Route-01.rtn
4 Route Planning
4-2
Route shown on the Screen:

W000
Planned course
W001
ECDIS
Planned speed [kt]

Leg
Port side (in red line)

and port side width
Arrival radius
Starboard side (in green line)

and starboard side width
WPT : Way Point
Note:
For each default value, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
4-3
4 Route Planning
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options

Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the Route Plan Setting panel opens.
2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.
UTC display
4 Route Planning
LMT display
4-4
b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is
displayed at WPT during route monitoring.
When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):
ECDIS
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:
4-5
4 Route Planning
c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
XTL PORT: Port side width
XTL STBD: Starboard side width
Arrival Radius:
Arrival radius
Speed:
Planned ships speed
Sail:
RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
ROT:
Turn rate
Turn Radius: Turn radius

Time Zone: Time zone
d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than
the set latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.
When the GC leg between W002 and W003

exceeds the maximum latitude (60N)
60N
When the maximum latitude is 60 or more, a GC leg exceeding 60 can be input.
W003 and W004 are added for limiting the

GC leg to the maximum latitude (60N).
(RL leg between W003 and W004)
60N
Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60, so a leg exceeding 60 is
not input.
e) Check Safety in Editing
During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal direction.
4 Route Planning
4-6
f) Route Type
Select a route type when making a route file.
TCS route
Normal route
ECDIS
WOP
WOL
Note:
In editing the route, "View Ship's Parameter" can be displayed.
"View Ship's Parameter" dialog is only a display.
In Route Editing menu (Table / Graphic)

Select [(4) Route] - [(5) View Ships Parameter] in that order.
Then, the View Ships Parameter panel opens.
4-7
4 Route Planning
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor

The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Table Editing mode
Table editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode

Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.
[Table Editing Screen]
How to open the Table Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.
4 Route Planning
4-8
How to exit the table editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button.
Alternatively, in the Table
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)

(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
ECDIS
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree

Main Menu
(1) File
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Reference
(1) New
4.1.2.4
(2) Open
4.1.2.5
(3) Import
(1) Normal
4.1.2.6
(2) TCS
4.1.2.6
(3) 2G TCS
4.1.2.6
(4) Save
4.1.2.4
(5) Save as
4.1.2.5
(6) Export
4.1.2.7
(7) Print WPT
4.1.2.1
(0) Exit from Route Planning
4.1.2.4
(2) Edit
(4) Sort Reversely
4.1.2.4
(3) AIS/TT
(1) TT1
3.3.9.1
(2) TT2
3.3.9.1
(3) AIS
3.3.9.1
(4) All
3.3.9.1
(5) Deactive All AIS
3.3.9.7
(6) All List
3.3.9.2
(7) Select List
3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track
3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation
3.3.9.4
3.3.9.2
(1) Message
(0) AIS Sentence
(4) Route
(1) Addressed Message
3.3.9.5
(2) Broadcast Message
3.3.9.5
(1) VDM
3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1
3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2
3.3.9.6
(0) AIS/TT Setting
3.34.1
3.34.2
(5) View Ships Parameter
4.1.1
(0) Setting
4.1.1
4-9
4 Route Planning
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree (Continued

Main Menu
(5) Chart
Submenu
(2) Off Center

(3) User Setting
Reference
(1) Event Mark
3.19.1
3.19.2
3.19.3
(4) Highlight
3.19.4
3.19.1
(1) Enter Position
3.4.5
(2) Home
3.4.1
3.8.1
(2) My Port List
3.8.2
3.29.3
3.29.4
3.9
(5) Fix View
3.7.3
3.31
(4) ARCS
(0) Setting
(6) Main
Submenu/Option
3.10.8
3.10.9
3.10.9
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
3.29.1
(2) Other Chart
3.29.2
(1) Maneuver Curve
3.20
/Remove Maneuver Curve

(2) Cross Bearing
(4) LOP
3.21
(1) Not Less Than
3.22
(2) Not More Than
3.22
(1) Create LOP
3.23
(2) Delete All LOP
3.23
(5) Print
3.37
(6) Save Screen
3.38
(9) Radar Overlay
(1) Radar1
3.3.8
(2) Radar2
3.3.8
(3) Range Rings
3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale

(3) Test
(0) Setting
4 Route Planning
(0) Setting
7.11
(1) Alarm Log
3.3.7
7.2
(3) Operating Time
7.3
(1) Color and Brilliance Setting
7.6
7.7
7.8
(4) Marker Setting
3.16.2.1
7.9
3.25
(8) Alarm Setting
7.10
(0) Buzzer Volume
3.3.5
4-10
Context Menu (Right Click on the chart display area)

Main Menu
Submenu
Reference
Abort
3.1.1.3
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information
3.14
Other Information
3.14
Zoom Area
3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM
CCRP EBL/VRM
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.2
EBL1
3.16.2.3
EBL2
3.16.2.3
VRM1
3.16.2.4
VRM2
3.16.2.4
Move Origin1
3.16.2.5
Move Origin2
3.16.2.5
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.6
EBL1
3.16.2.7
EBL2
3.16.2.7
VRM1
3.16.2.8
VRM2
3.16.2.8
3.17
3.10.1
Load Low Resolution
3.10.6
3.10.3
Change Active Panel
3.10.5
Note and Diagram
3.10.8
4-11
4 Route Planning
ECDIS
(2) Button functions

Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when inserting a new WPT.
Left-click when deleting a WPT.
Left-click to divide the leg.
Left-click to set default value on following columns.
PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.
Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking,
warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available for TCS mode only.
Left-click when you want to display the WPT during editing.
Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name
column contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.
Name :
You can enter name in the Name column.
WPT to WPT :
WPT
to
WPT
information
displayed.
Total :
W000 to WPTn information is displayed.
It shifts to Graphic Editor.

When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Graphic Editor.
4 Route Planning
4-12
is
(3) Context Menu on Table

When right-clicking on the table, a context menu is displayed. Operation is applied to the line which
displayed a menu.
Context Menu
ECDIS
Left-click when inserting a new WPT.

Left-click to divide the leg.
Left-click to set default value on following columns.
PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.
4-13
4 Route Planning
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor

The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.
(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)

Start
Clear any route if

displayed.
Enter the Table

Editing mode.
Left-click [New].
.
Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1) Table
Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.
Table editing operation
W000 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.)
W000 entry screen
Left-click the next

WPT No.
W001 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.)
Repeat WPT entry

until the final WPT.
The following items are automatically

displayed. Change, if necessary.
XTL(PORT/STBD)
ARR RAD
SPD[kn]
Sail (RL/GC)
Time Zone
Name
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close]
Exit the Table Editing mode.
End
4 Route Planning
4-14
(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)

Start
Clear any route if

displayed.
Enter the Table

Editing mode.
Left-click [Open].
Left-click [UNLOAD].
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1)
Table Editor] in that order.
Select a route file you want to edit.
ECDIS
Select route type.
Table editing operation
Edit the WPT table.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save]
To save without changing the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

in the menu.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Table Editing mode.
End
4-15
4 Route Planning
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)

This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.
(1) Unloading the selected route before starting

Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
Then, the Table Editing screen opens.
[MENU] Button
When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Table editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.
4 Route Planning
4-16
(4) Making a route

1) Left-click the LATatitude and LONongitude in the position column, and enter the position for
W000.
2) Left-click the next WPT No. (i.e., W001).
ECDIS
Then, the same position as the previous WPT (i.e. W000) is automatically set in the position
column. Also, default values are displayed in the other columns.
WPT can be made up to 511.
Position:
Latitude/Longitude
XTL PORT: Port side width

XTL STBD: Starboard side width
ARR RAD:
Arrival radius (This item isn't displayed in the TCS setting.)
SPD [kn]:
Ships speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)

ROT [/min]: The ship's rotation over every 1 minute (This item is automatically computed.)
Turn RAD:
The turning radius
Time Zone: Time zone

Name:
Comment entry column.

The contents of column are changed by left-clicking the [Name] drop-down list
button and then [Name], [WPT to WPT], or [Total].
Name:
You can enter a comment.
WPT to WPT: The Name column changes as follows:

CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Distance from waypoint to
waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint
Total:
The Name column changes as follows:

CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Total distance from waypoint 0
to the specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to
the specified waypoint
4-17
4 Route Planning
[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]
(5) Saving the route file

1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
Close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing buttons
are cleared from the screen.
The route file can be edited even after it is saved.
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal
direction.
4 Route Planning
4-18
How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:

Left-click WPT No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Insert WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.
Then, the new WPT will be added to the WPT No. 2, and the W002 and later
WPTs will move by one line downwardly.
ECDIS

Left-click W002, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Delete WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.
Then, the W002 is deleted and W003 and later WPTs will move by one line
upwardly.
4-19
4 Route Planning
How to edit in the Table Editing Menu: -- Continued:
After entering WPT(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
The Route Warning Check panel opens.
Left-click Select Leg or All Leg and left click the
[OK] button. (When you use Select Leg, you
should select a WPT to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the
displayed chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP
charts that cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route
Check] result display box.
[For Select Leg ]
[For All Leg ]
Note:
In case of C-Map(Dynamic License), credit decrease for access charts under
the route when Safety Check.
4 Route Planning
4-20
How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.
The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the
chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.
ECDIS
Shown in red
Shown in red
You can make a route while watching the WPT on the chart. For example, above
chart is made with the [View SYNC] button left-clicked to set it ON.
This button is available
for TCS mode only.
4-21
4 Route Planning

1) Left-click the WPT with GC leg you want to divide in the WPT table.
In the Table Editing Button
Select [Divide] Button in that order.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Divide] from the context menu
for Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't
displayed.
(When you want to divide the leg between W002 and W003, select
W003.)
Then, the Divide Route W002 to W003 panel will open.
Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

Every:
Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg
type is changed from GC to RL.)
4 Route Planning
4-22

[Before dividing]
ECDIS
[After dividing]
4-23
4 Route Planning

[Before dividing RL leg]
After dividing]
4 Route Planning
4-24

[Editing the Course and Distance in the WPT to WPT display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WPT to WPT]. You can edit the values of CRS (Course to the next WPT) and
DIST (Distance to the next WPT) columns.
ECDIS
Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the W001 are modified. As a
result, the position of the W002 changes according to this modification. Since the
position of the W002 changes, the Cse and Dist values of W002 for W003 also
change.
W002 (After modification)
W003
W001
W002 (Before modification)
[Editing the ETA in the Total display mode]

In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WPT from
W000) column.
When you edit the WPTns ETA, the ETA and ETD of W000 to WPTn-1 are
calculated based on the WPTns ETA, and the calculated ETA values are
displayed in the table.
4-25
4 Route Planning

[Sort Reversely]
In the Table Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Before reverse sorting
After reverse sorting
4 Route Planning
4-26

It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.
In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor
mode.
When editing the route.
When opening the created route.
Editorial contents and a file name and so on are taken over to "Graphic Editor".
ECDIS
4-27
4 Route Planning
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)

This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.

You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
- When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.
4 Route Planning
4-28

When saving without changing the file name:
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:
1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see
(5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rot_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files).
CSV format:
For each WPT of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this
file. You can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.
4-29
4 Route Planning
ECDIS
(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import.
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be
exported already has a name, save it as rot_[date and time].csv. If you wish to change the file name,
follow the naming rules such as rot_[date and time].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button
to save the route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn, its
name will be set to rot_[date and
time].csv.
4 Route Planning
4-30
Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
In the following case, Export becomes invalid.
When not creating more than two WPT by New
In case of not opening a route
ECDIS
4-31
4 Route Planning
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor

The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Graphic Editing mode
Graphic editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the
Graphic Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPTs. The position
(latitude/longitude) of the cursor is shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you
have entered the WPT, you can move the WPT with the [Move] button or edit the WPT position with the
[Info] button. Also, the route you have made can be edited with the Table Editor.
For positioning the WPTs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.
[Graphic Editing Screen]
How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:

Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the Graphic Editing mode will open the
special menu for Graphic Editor.
4 Route Planning
4-32
How to exit the graphic editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the
Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic

Editor)
(1) Graphic editing menu
ECDIS
The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(1) New
(2) Open
(3) Import
(2) Edit
Reference
4.1.3.4
4.1.3.5
(1) Normal
4.1.3.6
(2) TCS
4.1.3.6
(3) 2G TCS
4.1.3.6
(4) Save
4.1.3.5
(5) Save as
4.1.3.5
(6) Export
4.1.3.7
(7) Print WPT
4.1.3.1
(0) Exit from Route Planning
4.1.3.1
(1) Use EBL/VRM
4.1.3.8
(2) Use Assistant-Circle
4.1.3.4
(3) Divide Leg

(3) AIS/TT
(4) Sort Reversely
4.1.3.4
(1) TT1
3.3.9.1
(2) TT2
3.3.9.1
(3) AIS
3.3.9.1
(4) All
3.3.9.1
3.3.9.7
(6) All List
3.3.9.2
(7) Select List

(8) Target Track
3.3.9.8
3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation
3.3.9.4
3.3.9.5

(1) Message
(0) AIS Sentence
3.3.9.2
3.3.9.5
(1) VDM
3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1
3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2
(4) Route
3.3.9.6
(0) AIS/TT Setting
3.34.1
3.34.2
(3) Distance Measurement
3.12.2
(5) View Ships Parameter
4.1.1
(0) Setting
4.1.1
4-33
4 Route Planning
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(5) Chart
Submenu
(2) Off Center

(3) User Setting
3.19.2
3.19.3
(4) Highlight
3.19.4
3.19.1
(1) Enter Position
3.4.5
(2) Home
3.4.1
3.8.1
(2) My Port List
3.8.2
3.29.3
3.29.4
3.9
(5) Fix View
3.7.3
3.31
(0) Setting
3.10.8
3.10.9
3.10.9
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
3.29.1
(2) Other Chart
3.29.2
(1) Maneuver Curve
3.20

(2) Cross Bearing
3.21
(1) Not Less Than
3.22
(2) Not More Than
3.22
(4) LOP
3.23
(5) Print
3.37
(6) Save Screen

(9) Radar Overlay
(3) Test
(0) Setting
4 Route Planning
Reference
3.19.1
(4) ARCS
(6) Main
Submenu/Option
(1) Event Mark
3.38
(1) Radar1
3.3.8
(2) Radar2
3.3.8
(3) Range Rings
3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
3.3.8
(0) Setting
7.11
(1) Alarm Log
3.3.7
7.2
(3) Operating Time
7.3
7.6
7.7
7.8
(4) Marker Setting
3.16.2.1
7.9
3.25
(8) Alarm Setting
7.10
(0) Buzzer Volume
3.3.5
4-34
Context Menu
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will
be displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.
ECDIS
(It is set to some cursor mode.)
(A cursor mode is not set.)
Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Main Menu
Submenu
Reference
Abort
3.1.1.3
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information
3.13
Other Information
3.13
Zoom Area
3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM
CCRP EBL/VRM
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.2
EBL1
3.16.2.3
EBL2
3.16.2.3
VRM1
3.16.2.4
VRM2
3.16.2.4
Move Origin1
3.16.2.5
Move Origin2
3.16.2.5
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.6
EBL1
3.16.2.7
EBL2
3.16.2.7
VRM1
3.16.2.8
VRM2
3.16.2.8
3.17
3.10.1
Load Low Resolution
3.10.6
3.10.3
Change Active Panel
3.10.5
Note and Diagram
3.10.8
4-35
4 Route Planning
(2) Button functions

Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a
printer)
Left-click when adding a WPT to the W000 or the to the last WPT.
Left-click when inserting a WPT in the course of the route.
Left-click when moving a WPT.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WPT or leg.
This button is available for TCS mode only.
It shifts to Table Editor.

When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Table Editor.
4 Route Planning
4-36
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)

The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.
(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)

: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Start
ECDIS
Clear any route if

displayed.
Enter the Graphic

Editing mode.
Left-click [New].
Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.
Graphic editing operation

W000 entry
(using the cursor)
Next WPT entry
(using the cursor)
Repeat WPT entry

until the final WPT.
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End
4-37
4 Route Planning
(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)

Start
: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Clear any route if

displayed.
Left-click [UNLOAD].
Enter the Graphic

Editing mode.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
Left-click [Open].
Select a route file you want to edit.
Select route type.
Graphic editing operation
Edit the WPT.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save]
To save without changing the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

in the menu.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End
4 Route Planning
4-38
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)

This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
How to save the route:
The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
4-39
4 Route Planning
ECDIS
(4) Making a route

Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix
the EBL/VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM
Keys and Dials.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display
panel.
Note:
If [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To
turn on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using
supplemental lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(2) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(1) Use
EBL/VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.
4 Route Planning
4-40
1) Entering WPTs:
Left-click at the WPT (W000) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next
WPT (W001).
Then, left-click there.
[W000fixing/W000 to W001]
[W001 fixing]
ECDIS
[W001 to W002]
[W002 fixing]
4-41
4 Route Planning
How to shift the chart during entering WPTs:

Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart
while entering WPTs.
2) Terminating WPT entry:
Left-click twice quickly to terminate WPT entry. (You can also terminate the operation by
selecting [Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)
[Left-clicking twice quickly to stop entry]
[The route you have entered]
Note:
If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another
panel exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.
Creating routes using EBL/VRM:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.
Entering position
Line drawn from

the previous WPT
Then, decide where the EBL/VRM
intersection will be and left-click on it.
First, left-click on the center of

EBL/VRM.
4 Route Planning
4-42
Creating routes using Assistant Circle:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WPT input using a supplemental line is enabled.
1) W000 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own
ships position will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the
circles radius and supplemental line to W000, and left-click.
ECDIS
Supplemental line
Cursor
Supplemental line
W000
W000
This circle is not displayed in actual operation.
4-43
4 Route Planning
2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.
W000
Supplemental line
3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circles radius, and left-click.
intersection between the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WPT.
W000
Supplemental line
W001
4 Route Planning
4-44
The
How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:

Deleting the WPT:
1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to delete. Then, the selected WPT is deleted.
[Select W003.]
[W003 is deleted.]
ECDIS
Adding a WPT to the W000 or to the last WPT:

1) Left-click the [Add] button
2) Left-click the W000 or the last WPT. and rotate the trackball to move the
cursor for additional WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.
[Select W002 (the last WPT).]
4-45
[W003 is added.]
4 Route Planning
How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Moving a WPT (other than W000 and the last WPT):
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to move.and rotate the trackball to move the cursor
for moving the WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.
[Select W002.]
[W002 is moved.]
4 Route Planning
4-46
[Move W002.]

Inserting a new WPT between WPTs:
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button
2)
Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WPT there. and rotate the
trackball to insert a new WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT. A new
WPT is inserted and the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.]
[Make a new WPT.]

ECDIS
[New WPT is inserted as W002.]
4-47
4 Route Planning

Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.
Designating coordinates by entering position
1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the
cursor type on
the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the
cursor type
on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Bearing/Distance panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button.
the position is designated.
Note:
When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do
not require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.
4 Route Planning
4-48

Displaying/Modifying information of WPT or leg:
1) Left-click the [Property] button.
2) Left-click the WPT.
When WPT is selected, [Edit Waypoint] panel opens, while [Edit leg 1] panel
opens when Leg is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WPT.
If
you want to return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default]
button. (The default value is set in the Route Plan Option panel. See 4.1.1
Setting the Route Options.) After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel.
ECDIS
[Information for WPT.]
[Information for Leg.]
4-49
4 Route Planning
It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.
In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor mode.
When editing the route.
When opening the created route.
[Sort Reversely]
In the Graphic Editing mode
Then, the WPT is in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
4 Route Planning
4-50
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)

This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper
part on screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The Open Route File panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when
you make a new route file.
4-51
4 Route Planning
ECDIS

When saving without changing the file name:
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:
1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rot_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files).
4 Route Planning
4-52
(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start
file import.
ECDIS
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as rot_[date and time].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as rot_[date and time].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn,
its name will be set to rot_[date and
time].csv.
Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4-53
4 Route Planning
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and

Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation
panel. (You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)
Note:
Before starting, be sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.
Be sure that the check mark is attached.
The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is
set to ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.
2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
Left-click
Line drawn from own ship
4 Route Planning
4-54
3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned W000, and left-click
there.
Left-click
ECDIS
4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the W000 and EBL/VRM intersection.)
(This circle is not displayed.)
Left-click
4-55
4 Route Planning
5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WPT (W001), and left-click
there.
Left-click
Green line
(Starboard side)
Red line
(Port side)
6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WPT.
How to Edit the Route:

After pressing the [Add] or [Insert/Move WPT] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a
WPT in the same EBL/VRM operation as above.
4 Route Planning
4-56
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route

During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen.
The alternate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor.
The operation buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those
for the Graphic Editor. So, the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic
Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.
Note:
ECDIS
Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route,
the original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
TEMP.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the Save as menu, the alternate route is not replaced with
the original route.
(For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2 Creating
Alternate Route.)
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart

Start
During voyage
Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.
(Route is displayed.)
Enter Create Alternate

Route mode.
Alternate route
making operation
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route]
in that order.
Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.
: For [Property] button, see 4.1.3 Route Planning Using

the Graphic Editor.
Left-click the [Save]
button
The original route is replaced with the alternate route.

(If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use Save as menu. In this case, the original
route remains as it is. For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.)
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.
End
4-57
4 Route Planning
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route

The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that,
during creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPTs are altered:
Position of W001 (Moved)
W002 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.)
W006 (Added one WPT to the last WPT.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.
[Original Route]
[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]
W006:
Added to the last WPT.
Alternate Route
W001:
Position changed.
W002:
Inserted.
4 Route Planning
4-58
(1) Alternate Route Editing mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for
Graphic Editor.)
[Alternate Route Editing Screen]
Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu:
ECDIS
On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode

Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic
Editor.)
(2) Creating Alternate Route

The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens.
(When you use the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using
EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
Note:
Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from
the original route.
4-59
4 Route Planning
Moving the WPT for Alternate Route:

2) Left-click the WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving W001. Then, left-click
to fix the new W001 for the alternate route.
[Select W001.]
[Move W001.]
How to shift the chart during making an

alternate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button
down, and then move the cursor to scroll
the chart while creating alternate routes.
[Fix the new W001 for alternate route.]
Alternate route is created. (Orange)
Moved new WPT (W001).
4 Route Planning
4-60
Inserting the WPT for Alternate Route:

2) Left-click the leg between W001 and W002 and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
inserting a new WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT. New W002 is inserted and the number of
the later WPTs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.]
ECDIS
[Position the new W002.]
[New WPT is inserted as W002.]
Inserted WPT (W002).
4-61
4 Route Planning
Adding the WPT for Alternate Route:

You can add the WPT to the first WPT or to the last WPT.
1) Left-click the [Add] button.
2) Left-click the first WPT or last WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional
WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT.
[Select the first WPT or last WPT.]
[Position the new first WPT or last WPT.]
[W006 is added as the last
Added WPT (W006).
4 Route Planning
4-62
Deleting the WPT from Alternate Route:

1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click the WPT you want to delete. The selected WPT will be deleted.
(In the example, W002 is deleted. You can also delete any WPT of the alternate route, such as
W003.)
[Select W002.]
[W002 is deleted.]
ECDIS
You can use this button to display and edit the selected WPT and leg.
For details, see [Property] button (page 4-50) of (4) Making a route in
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing).
Sort Reversely of WPTs:

In the Alternate Editing mode
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Safety Check of WPTs:
When checking the safety of the route, click Safety Check button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Limit Check of WPTs:
When checking the Limit of the route, click Limit Check button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear when exceeding the demarcation of the sailing
feature of the own ship
4-63
4 Route Planning
(3) Saving the alternate route file

a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as TEMP, and, when you close the file, the alternate route
TEMP becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate
route TEMP.
Then, the alternate route file is save as TEMP.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route TEMP.
b) When saving as the new file ([(5) Save as] menu):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the
original route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.
1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save as] in the order.
2) Enter the file name and comment.

4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
4 Route Planning
4-64
5
Chart Editing
5-1
This chapter describes how to create user maps and how to manually update charts.
User Map
User map can be created and displayed on other charts. User map information contains various objects
(symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User map can also be edited and updated. Also, you can merge
multiple maps together to create one user map.
The following figures show how to use user map:
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
User Map 2
User Map 1
User Map 2
Chart
User Map 1
Chart
You can merge as

one user map.
Chart
How to Display the User Map:

To display the user map, see 3.13 Displaying a User Map.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) Select User Map] in the order.
Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated.
When you save data after
manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.
Enter the date. You can check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
information.
Unlike User Map Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore,
the objects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the
chart. For the method of hiding the objects, see 0 .
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the
chart.
The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.
Note:
C-MAP charts cannot be updated manually.
The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or ARCS chart can be used commonly in those charts.
5 Chart Editing
5-2
5.1 Chart Edit Mode

There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow
the procedure below to start there modes.
User Map Edit mode:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.
A map edit screen as shown below will be displayed.
Use this screen to create/edit a user map.
[User Map Editing Screen]
ECDIS
Manual Update mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering
screen on the left are slightly different).
Use this screen to manually update a chart.
How to open the Chart Edit menu:

In User Map Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen. The following Chart Edit menu
will be displayed at the top of the screen.
5-3
5 Chart Editing
5.2 Menus and Button Functions

5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User
Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.
Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Reference
(1) New
5.3.2.1
(2) Open
5.3.2.2
(3) Import
(1) CSV file(WGS84)
5.3.2.4
(2) CSV file(TOKYO)
5.3.2.4
(3) OLD Format
5.3.2.4
(4) Export
(5) Save
5.3.2
(6) Save as
5.3.2
(7) Merge
5.3.2.3
(0) Exit from User Map Editor
5.3.2.1
(2) Edit
(4) Use EBL/VRM
5.3.2
(0) Setting
5.3.2.5
(3) AIS/TT
(1) TT1
3.3.9.1
(2) TT2
3.3.9.1
(3) AIS
3.3.9.1
(4) All
3.3.9.1
3.3.9.7
(6) All List
3.3.9.2
(7) Select List
3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track
3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation
3.3.9.4
3.3.9.5
3.3.9.5
(1) VDM
3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1
3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2
3.3.9.6

(1) Message
3.3.9.4
(0) AIS Sentence
(4) Chart
(0) AIS/TT Setting
3.35.1
3.35.2
(2) Off Center

(3) User Setting
5 Chart Editing
5-4
(1) Event Mark
3.19.1
3.19.2
3.19.3
(4) Highlight
3.19.4
3.19.1
(1) Enter Position
3.4.5
(2) Home
3.4.1
3.8.1
Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(6) Chart
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(3) User Setting
3.8.2
3.29.3
3.29.4
3.9
(5) Fix View
3.7.3
3.31
(4) ARCS
(0) Setting
(5) Main
Reference
(2) My Port List
3.10.8
3.10.9
3.10.9
(1) S-57/ C-MAP / ARCS
3.29.1
(2) Other Chart
3.29.2
(1) Maneuver Curve
3.20
ECDIS
(2) Cross Bearing
3.21
(1) Not Less Than

(2) Not More Than
3.22
3.22
(4) LOP
3.23
(5) Print
3.37
(6) Save Screen
3.38
(9) Radar Overlay
(3) Test
(0) Setting
(1) Radar1
3.3.8
(2) Radar2
3.3.8
(3) Range Ring
3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
3.3.8
(0) Setting
3.34.1
(1) Alarm Log
3.3.7
7.2
(3) Operating Time
7.3
7.6
7.7
7.8
(4) Marker Setting
3.16.2.1
3.25
(8) Alarm Setting
7.10
(0) Buzzer Volume
3.3.5
(0) INS Setting
5-5
5 Chart Editing
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type
when right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 Entering Objects for
details on the various cursor types.
Buttons for the same operations:

Move
Delete
Add Vertex
Insert/Move Vertex
Delete Vertex
Property
When not edit mode (Cursor column is displayed nothing)
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.

Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way
point, and enter an object in that position.
When edit mode (Cursor column is displayed operation)
5 Chart Editing
5-6
. Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Main Menu
Submenu
Reference
Abort
3.1.1.3
S-57/ C-MAP /ARCS Information
3.14
Other Information
3.14
Zoom Area
3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM
CCRP EBL/VRM
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.2
EBL1
3.16.2.3
EBL2
3.16.2.3
VRM1
3.16.2.4
VRM2
3.16.2.4
Move Origin1
3.16.2.5
Move Origin2
3.16.2.5
EBL1/VRM1
3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2
3.16.2.6
EBL1
3.16.2.7
EBL2
3.16.2.7
VRM1
3.16.2.8
VRM2
3.16.2.8
3.17
3.10.6
Load Low Resolution
3.10.5
3.10.2
Change Active Panel
3.10.4
Note and Diagram
3.10.7
5-7
5 Chart Editing
ECDIS
5.2.2 Button Functions

In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons
are used in User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Map Edit mode]
Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Map Edit Mode.
During user map edit:

Left-click on this button to create a new user map file.
Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual
update).
Left-click on this button to save a created user map.
Left-click when moving an object.
Left-click when deleteing an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding
line to the area.
Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
It deles the part of the object.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
[Manual Update mode]
Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
During manual update:

Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.
Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual
update).
Left-click on this button to save the updating chart.
Left-click when moving an object.
Left-click when deleteing an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or an area surrounding line
to the area.
Left-click when inserting a segment into the line..
It deles the part of the object.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
5 Chart Editing
5-8
5.3 User Map Editor Operation

This section describes how to edit user maps. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4
Manual Update Operation.
Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user map file and when you open a
created file. Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of
chapter 4 Route Planning.
5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit

(1) Creating a new user map file
Start
ECDIS
Start User Map Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
[New] button.
Open a new user map file.
Map edit operation
Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts
Left-click on the
[Save] button.
See 5.5 Entering Objects .
Enter a file name and

a comment.
Select a datum in the

Datum Conversion
panel.
Left-click on the
[Close] button.
Exit User Map Edit mode.
End
5-9
5 Chart Editing
(2) Editing a user map file

Start
Start User Map Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
[Open] button.
Open user map file you wish to edit.
Map edit operation
Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts
See 5.5 Entering Objects.
When overwriting
Left-click on the
[Save] button.
When saving under a new file name

Select [Save as] from
the menu.

Datum Conversion
panel.
Left-click on the
[Close] button.
Exit User Map Edit mode.
End
5 Chart Editing
5-10
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map

File operations are different when you create a new user map and when you edit an existing user map.
This section describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit). This
section also describes how to merge user map and how to import user map files.
Creating a new user map -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
Editing a user map -> See Section 5.3.2.2
Merging user map -> See Section 5.3.2.3
Importing user map -> See Section 5.3.2.4
Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. ("Simple Line", "Warning Line", "Polygon", "Warning Area"
counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20000, the "Max Point" notice occurs and it isn't possible
to do the addition of the object.
ECDIS
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map

Follow the procedure below to create a new user map.
(1) Entering the Map Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in the order.
How to exit the user map editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Map Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit
from User Map Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Map Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Map Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, or left-click any position on the map.
[Map Editing Menu]
(2) Opening a new user map file

1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
5-11
5 Chart Editing
(3) Entering objects

1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).
If using EBL/VRM: Check it.
If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.
2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.

After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.
(4) Saving a user map file

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save], [(6) Save as] in that order.
The Save as panel opens.
2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.
5 Chart Editing
5-12
3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.

Then, the Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
Select Datum:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
Then, the system exit the User Map Editing mode.
(5) Exiting the User Map Editing mode

1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.
2) When you are not operating in the editing, this editor is closed and changed to normal mode.
3) When you are operating in the editing, the confirmation dialog is displayed.
It returns to the edit-display.
It changes to the save operation.

(See (4) Saving a user map file)
User Map Editor is closed and

editing contents is canceled.
5-13
5 Chart Editing
ECDIS
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map

Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user map.
(1) Starting User Map Editing mode

(2) Opening a user map file

1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
The Open Chart File panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map file will be displayed.
(3)
Entering objects
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.
5 Chart Editing
5-14
(4) Saving a user map file

When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Map Edit mode.
When saving a file under a different name (using the [(6) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
The Save as panel will be displayed.
ECDIS
2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.

3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Map Edit mode ends.
5-15
5 Chart Editing
5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps

You can merge the user maps as follows:
1) Make a new user map file or recall a user map file.
(For example, recall User-01 file.)
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(7) Merge] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
Then, the system exits the User Map Editing mode.
User Map "USER-02"

User Map "USER-01"
You can merge as one

user map.
User Map
5 Chart Editing
5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps

User map files can be imported and used.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.
And select a file format to be used at the destination.
- CSV file (WGS-84)
Select this when importing user map data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)
Select this when importing user map data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as
WGS-84 geodetic system data.
ECDIS
The Open panel will be displayed.
2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map will be displayed on the screen.
Note:
When importing, MIN Scale of import object is set to 1/1000000 and MAX Scale is set to
1/4000000.
5-17
5 Chart Editing
5.3.2.5 User Map Setting

The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Editor Setting panel will be displayed.
Range of scale to display the object:

Minimum Scale / Maximum Scale
The setting of the color:
Symbol Color / Text Color / Line Color
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The thickness of the line: Five kinds
The style of the line:
Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.
The setting of a filling color in Area:
The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.
The set to size of the font:
Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts
To fix setting, click this button.
If you want to cancel the operation and close
the dialog, click this button.
To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.
Note:
The following object is always displayed in the red regardless of "Editor Setting".
Symbol - Warning" : Symbol Color

Line - "Warning Line" : Line Color
Area - "Warning Area" : Line Color, Fill Color
"Warning Line" object displays a unique line irrespective of the setting of Line Width and
Line Style.
5 Chart Editing
5-18
5.4 Manual Update Operation

This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user map edit process, see 5.3
Operation Flowchart When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the
issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that
passed since the manual update, are met (see page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically
from the chart.
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update

Start
Start Manual Update

mode.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in
that order.
Left-click on the
[Start] button.
Left-click on a chart
you wish to edit.
[Example]
Chart edit operation
Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts
See 5.5 Entering Objects.
Left-click on the
[Save] button

Datum Conversion
panel.
Enter the issue date of

a notice to mariners.
Left-click on the
[Close] button.
Exit Manual Update mode.
End
5-19
5 Chart Editing
ECDIS
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects

This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 Flow of
Manual Update).
Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. (On "Polygon" object, "Warning Area" object and Line Object
except for "Arc", it counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20,000, the "Max Point" notice occurs
and it isn't possible to do the addition of the object.
(1) Starting Manual Update mode

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in that order.
- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button
again or left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.
[Chart Edit menu]
(2) Selecting a chart to be edited

1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The Information panel will be displayed.
Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel
closes.
2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.

A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the
panel closes (as shown below).
Note:
When you click the [Start] button in the editing, the following operation is done.
When not editing, the new operation becomes beginning.

When editing, confirmation dialog "Save Change to ****?" is displayed.
Yes: It shifts to the save operation.
No: It cancels update contents, and new operation
becomes beginning.
Cancel: It closes a dialog and returns to edit operation.
5 Chart Editing
5-20
(3) Entering Objects

(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(4) Use EBL/VRM] off
(remove a checkmark) by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a Manual Update
file.
ECDIS
(4) Saving a Manual Update

1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
In the Manual Update Editing menu
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Normally, conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally,
conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
The Notices to Mariners panel opens.
Enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.

4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.
5-21
5 Chart Editing
Tips!
(How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
You can use the Object Information panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for
entered objects.
In the normal menu
It right-clicks a screen and it chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from Context Menu..
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.
Display example
5 Chart Editing
5-22
5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting

The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.
1) In the Manual Update Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Editor Setting panel will be displayed.
The setting of the color:

Symbol Color (General Symbol) / Text Color /
Line Color (General Line and area)
The thickness of the line: Five kinds
The style of the line:
Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.
The setting of a filling color in Area:
The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.
The set to size of the font:
Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts
To fix setting, click this button.
the dialog, click this button.
To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.
Note:
Editor Setting is applied to the following item.
Symbol Color: "General" category in "Symbol" tab. (Except for "Warning")
Text Color: All symbol in "Text" tab.
Line Color: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area"tab. (Except for "Warning
Line" and "Warning Area"; displaying red)
Line Width, Line Style: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except
for "Warning Line" )
Fill Color: All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except for "Warning Area" )
Transparency: All symbol of "Area" tab.
Font Size (Small): "Small Font" in "Text" tab.
Font Size (Large): "Large Font" in "Text" tab.
5-23
5 Chart Editing
ECDIS
5.5 Entering Objects

This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Map Edit and
Manual Update modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Map
Edit mode and Manual Update mode use different symbols and lines.
Object types available for user map edit
[Symbol] Tab
5 Chart Editing
[Line] Tab
[Area] Tab
5-24
[Text] Tab
Object types available for manual update

[Symbol] Tab
[Line] Tab
[Area] Tab
[Text] Tab
ECDIS
5-25
5 Chart Editing
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types

1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See How to Select Objects below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
Now you can enter the object you have selected.
How to Select Objects:

You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select Light flare, default
symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows.
1) Left-click Buoys twice quickly to open the items
behind it.
2) Left-click Barrel buoy twice quickly to open the items
behind it. (Keep continue this operation until - mark
disappears.)
3) Left-click Light flare, default.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
To close Buoys, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also select the item by left-clicking + and -
mark:
Left-clicking + will open the behind items.
Left-clicking - will close the behind items.
5 Chart Editing
5-26
1)
2)
3)
5.5.2 Entering Objects

See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when entering objects.
(1) How to enter symbols

Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
Second entry
First entry
ECDIS
Last entry
Deleting symbols [Delete]:

1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to delete.
Selected symbol
Moving symbols [Move]:

1) Left-click the [Move] button,
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
Edit
(When you left-click the cursor.)
5-27
5 Chart Editing
Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:

Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding
symbols, lines, areas and text.
Designating coordinates by entering position
inserting and adding symbols, lines and areas.
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance
inserting and adding objects, lines, areas and text.
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Bearing/Distance panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button
the position is designated...
Note:
When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from
the previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous position. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that
do not require relative positions, such as symbol and text entering.
5 Chart Editing
5-28
Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):

Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Property.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
You can edit the latitude and longitude by entering position LAT and LON.
You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to Rotation.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
ECDIS
Rotated symbol by 90 degrees
Difference in symbol display between User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the
user map edit operation will not have this mark.
[Symbols used in the user map edit operation]
[Symbols used in the manual update operation]
This mark will be

added.
5-29
5 Chart Editing
Tips!
You can check the current edit mode at Cursor column of upper part of screen.
For example, When displayed [Move map] in Cursor column. It is Move mode.
Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)
Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the
Manual Update Operation).
Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:

You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or
drawing a line. When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.
5 Chart Editing
5-30
(2) How to draw lines

Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a
line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line.
ECDIS
Tips!
(Moving the chart)
Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart.
Move the trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.
Deleting the line [Delete]:

2) Left-click the line you want to delete.
Tips!
(Moving the chart)
When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In]
button provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target
segment easily.
5-31
5 Chart Editing
Inserting the segment [Insert/Move Vertex]:

1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Edit
Moving the Vertex [Insert/Move Vertex]:

2) Left-click the segment you want to move the vertex.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the vertex.
Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:

1) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Add VTX.
2) Left-click the last segment of the line.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) Left-click twice quickly to stop to add the new segment.
5 Chart Editing
5-32
Moving the line [Move]:

1) Left-click the [Move] button,
2) Left-click the line you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the line is moved to the new position.
Edit
ECDIS
Getting information and editing information (Line)

1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the lines attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style
(3
styles).
- You can enter a comment.
5-33
5 Chart Editing
(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon) / (Warning Area)

How to draw the Polygon and Warning Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that
for line. So, for detailed operation, refer to (2) How to draw lines mentioned earlier.
Drawing area (Polygon) / (Warning Area):
1) Select Polygon or Warning Area on the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line and area is created.
(Draw sides)
(Left-click twice quickly)
Getting information and edit area (line):

2) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.
(Same color but transparency differs.)
5 Chart Editing
5-34
Moving the area [Move]:

1) Left-click the [Move] button.
2) Left-click the area you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the area is moved to the new position.
Edit
ECDIS
Deleting the area [Delete]:

2) Left-click the area you want to delete.
Adding a side to the area [Insert/Move Vertex]:

2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional side.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the side. Then, area is created.
Edit
5-35
5 Chart Editing
(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse

1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw an ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, Left-click the [Property] button, and
Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
(Ellipse)
(Left-click the cursor.)
(Draw Circle)
(Same color but Transparency differs)
0%
50%
[Location/Attributes panel for Circle/Ellipse]

You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.
5 Chart Editing
5-36
(5) How to draw areas -- Fan

1) Select Fan on the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor. Then, area is created.
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click the
inside of the area to select it.
Case 1
ECDIS
Case 2
[Location/Attributes panel for Fan]

longitude.
You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical and angle of the fan.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.
5-37
5 Chart Editing
(6) How to enter text (small/large font)

1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens. You can specify the location and select attributes
by using this panel.
(When you select Small Font)
(When you select Large Font)
[Location/Attributes panel for text]

longitude.
You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.
3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.
The settings made in the Location/Attributes panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.
5 Chart Editing
5-38
4) Editing entered text

Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit
(Text, for example).
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens. By referring to step 2) above, edit the position
and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text.
ECDIS
5-39
5 Chart Editing
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual

Update Operation)
Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them
from the chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.
(1) Hiding objects

And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order..
3) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.
(2) Restoring hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again.
The objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.
(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.
Note:
The object which operated "Hiding Object" maintains a hiding condition to 90 days.
When passing more than 91 days, an object is deleted.
5 Chart Editing
5-40
Automatic
Sailing
6-1
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route
and crossing safety contour.
When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and
ships position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route
is possible.
Note:
Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.
6.1 Automatic Sailing System

6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, you need to perform the following operation for turning
the ship.
On the operation panel, press the [TURN] key.
[Turing Operation]
Next Leg
Arrival alarm
Boundary of WPT
Cross track distance (XTD)
6 Automatic Sailing
6-2
6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route

When the ship arrived at the WOL, you need to perform the following operation for turning the ship.
Category B
Actual Course Change alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL, and press the [TURN]
key on the operation panel.
Category C
Turns automatically when arriving at WOL.
[Turing Operation]
ECDIS
Next Leg
Actual Course Change alarm

is occurred 30 seconds before
arrived at WOL.
WOL
6-3
6 Automatic Sailing
6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm

Warning and Alarm
Warning/alarm
Arrived at WPT
Condition of warning/
alarm occurrence
The ship has arrived at the
Operating status of
automatic sailing
Remarks
Can be continued.
Turn becomes possible.
Only TCS
Can be continued.
Can be continued.
boundary of the set WPT.

Actual Course
30 seconds before arrived
Change
at WOL
Off Course
The difference between

heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.
XTD
The ship has gone beyond the set route width.
Arrived at LAST
On the sailing final leg, the
Stop automatic sailing after
WPT
time has reached 1-5
passing through the final
minute(s) before the
destination.
estimated arrival time at
Change the steering mode of the autopilot to

Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
the destination.
Automatic sailing
Automatic sailing cant be
failed
continued by one of the
mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
following cause:
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
Should be stopped.
Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
POSN1 error
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
GYRO error
manual for autopilot.)
Route error
Calling back
Arrived at WPT alarm or
navigator
Route alarm does not
acknowledge for 30
seconds or more.
Should be stopped.

Low Speed
Ship speed through water
Can be continued.
has lowered to less than

the set value.
POSN1(Data)
The system position 1 has
In case of DNV-classed
some errors.
vessels holding NAUT- OC
notation, use dead-
reckoning for 10 minutes,
and then, stop automatic
sailing.
POSN1 shifted
The system position shifts
Can be continued.
Should be stopped.
beyond the limit.

Heading(Data)
Gyrocompass has got out

of order.

Log(Data)
Sensor for speed through
Should be stopped.
water has got out of order.

Autopilot(Data)
The autopilot has got out of
Should be stopped.
order.

6 Automatic Sailing
6-4
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing

Automatic sailing can be set.
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the AUTO Sail Setting panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
ECDIS
a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained.
There are three settings: [Low] [Mid] [High]. An example of the difference between the own
ship cross track distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route
depending on the tracking gain setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to
the port side when the ships heading is 0 degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is
shown.
High
Mid
Low
Note:
The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.
6-5
6 Automatic Sailing
b) Drift Correction
When the ships speed is more than 5 knots, then control according to [None], [High], [Mid]
and [Low] setting will take drift into consideration.
Set heading
Drift
Actual route that is expected
c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified
range centered on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001 NM to 0.999 NM.
Next waypoint
Dead band
Previous waypoint
Set heading
(parallel to the route)
d) AUTO Stop (Only TCS category B)

Time until automatic sailing stop automatically when turning operation is not done even if
WOL is passed is set.
AUTO Stop can be set within the range from 0 min to 4 min.
This item is not displayed when using Normal type or TCS category C of A/P type.
6 Automatic Sailing
6-6
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation

The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.
ECDIS
Autopilot
1) Select the [Route], and [Start] automatic

2) Set the mode of the autopilot to NAVI for
sailing.
(See the descriptions below for the
the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
details of this procedure.)
(Set it to RC for the autopilot made by

TOKIMEC.)
3) Monitor the route.

4) After ending voyage, change the mode of
the autopilot from the NAVI to HAND.
5) Select [UNLOAD] for [Route] to clear the
route from the screen.
ECDIS
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic
sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the
[TURN] key.).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents
may result.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Note:
For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.
6-7
6 Automatic Sailing
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT

To select the route, use the [Route] on the display panel.
When using A/P that is not TCS type
Selecting Normal route (extension .rtn).
When using A/P that is TCS type
Selecting TCS route (extension .rta).
The route where the Limit Check and Safety Check by Route Planning was done is displayed in the
left of route name, "OK>".
Normal Route
TCS route that doesn't Limit check and Safety
check by Route Planning
TCS route that does Limit check and Safety
check by Route Planning
To select the WPT, use the [To WPT] on the display panel.
6 Automatic Sailing
6-8
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route

Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WPT panel opens.
Displays the [Route] file selecting on the display
panel.
Choose "To Waypoint" number displaying
alternative which was set in the [Route] file.
the panel, click [Cancel].
To fix setting, click [OK].
If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected Normal Route.
ECDIS

Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.
Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].
3) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.
Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, Arrived at WPT alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn.
Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.
[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.
6-9
6 Automatic Sailing
6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route

Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WPT panel opens.
Displays the [Route] file
selecting on the display panel.
Choose "To Waypoint" number
displaying alternative which
was set in the [Route] file.
Please do not change the
setting as follows:
Pre Run Speed
Pre Run Time
Enter Angle
Turn Radius
Pre Run Distance
XTD MAX
To fix setting, click [OK].
If you want to cancel the operation and close the dialog,

click [Cancel].
If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected TCS route.
If the following warning is displayed, check the Limit and Safety check by Route Planning.

6 Automatic Sailing
6-10

If there is no problem in the setting, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.
4) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.
Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:
When Actual Course Change alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn.
ECDIS
Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.
[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.
6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
2) Left-click the [OK] to stop the automatic sailing.

When [Cancel] is clicked, Auto Sail is continued.
6-11
6 Automatic Sailing
6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(3) Disconnect] in that order.
2) Left-click the [OK] to disconnect AUTO Sail.

[Cancel] is left-click when canceling Disconnect AUTO Sail.
Note:
When execute disconnect, the following menu changes invalidly.
[Menu] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1)Start]

[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] - [(3)Disconnect]
By exit to Navigation & Planning and start again, it returns in the validity.
6 Automatic Sailing
6-12
7
Tools and Setting/
Serviceman Menu
7-1
7.1 File Manager
Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route
files and user chart files can also be deleted.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) File Manager] in that order.
Example of Copying:
Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.
1) Left-click the drop-down button a, then select Route File from the box. When route files are
selected, all files with the extensions .rtn and .rta are displayed.
2) Select Local Disk from box b. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box
c.
3) Left-click the drop-down button d, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box c, then
left-click the [Copy] button (f) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy
disk. When a file is selected from the box e, and the button g is clicked, then a file on the
floppy disk can be copied to the hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, User Map should be selected from the box a. (Files with the
extension .uch are displayed.)
7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu
7-2
a)
b)
d)
e)
c)
f)
g)
ECDIS
* [COPY>>] and [<<COPY] can not be selected when setting the same drive to both of box
b and box d.
*
[Device is not ready.] message is displayed when selecting a [DVD Drive] or [Floppy
Disk] in box b or box d without inserting it.
* [During file operating Data Backup/Restore is not opened] message is displayed when
the following operation is done and it cannot continue while copying Voyage Log.
Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Backup]
Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Restore]
Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box c, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box c. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so
press the [OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box e to delete
files in box e with the [Delete] button under it.
* Following file can not be deleted.
Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)
Current date Own ship Track or Voyage Log file
([The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process.]
message is displayed.)
7-3
Files that can be handled with File Manager:

Type
Route File
Local
DVD
Floppy
USB
Ship
Disk
Drive
Disk
Device
LAN
Normal route files (extension .rtn)

TCS route files (extension .rta)
(Created with chapter 4 Route Planning)
User Map
User chart files (extension .uch)

(Created with chapter 5 Chart Editing)
Own Track
Own ship track files (extension .own)

(Refer to chapter 3 Own ships setting)
Target Track
Target track files (extension .atr)
Screen
Saved screen (by manual) files (extension .bmp)
Shot(MANU)
(Refer to chapter 3 Saving the Screen)
Screen
Saved screen (by auto) files(extension .bmp)
Shot(AUTO)
Voyage Log
Voyage log files
(1)
: available, : not available

1 Cannot copy from [USB device] to [Local].
Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:

When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, Backup will be added to
boxes c and d. By selecting Backup, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or
they can be copied from the backup device.
Overwriting Files:
When overwrite copying more than one file, "Over Write?" confirmation is displayed every file.
It is overwritten when clicking [OK] by the Over Write? screen.
It is not overwritten when clicking [Cancel] by the Over Write? screen.
* Following file can not be overwritten.
Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)
7-4
7.2 System Information

The system information can be confirmed.
1) In the normal menu:
Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(2)System Information] in that order.
[System Information] panel is displayed.
[Type]: Type of system is displayed.
It displays each version
[Process Manager]
[ECDIS App]
[Chartportfolio]
[TCS]: TCS is displayed.
[Maintenance No.]:
Maintenance number of 8 digits is displayed.
ECDIS
2) How to close the [System Information] panel:

The panel closes when clicking [Close] button.
7-5
7.3 Operating Time

Operating time of Display, HDD1 and HDD2 can be confirmed.
1) In the normal menu:
Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(3)Operating Time] in that order.
[Operating Time] panel is displayed.
[Display]: Operating time of display
[HDD1]: Operating time of HDD1
[HDD2]: Operating time of HDD2
2) [Operating Time] panel closes when clicking [Close] button.
7-6
7.4 Color Test (ARCS Only)

The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(4) ARCS Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.
ECDIS
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.
7-7
7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
Primary position and secondary position of own ship
Bearing and speed
Date data source
Time zone data source
Note:
The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position

On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or
dead-reckoning). This is called the primary position (POSN1) or system position. A secondary position
(POSN2) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how
far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Position fixing system for the primary position

POSN1 (Select from (D)GPS1, (D)GPS2and DR.)
Position fixing system for the secondary position

POSN2 (Select from (none), (D)GPS1,
(D)GPS2, DR and DR-Reset.)
Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display
Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.
(D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
(D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
LORAN-C: LORAN-C is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position
GPS-Compass: GPS-Compass is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position
DR (normally, not used): The own ships position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship
speed, SDME, etc.
none: The secondary position is not used.
DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POSN1 is used as
the reference position of DR. The GPS data obtained when OK in Sensor
Connection panel is left-clicked after DR-Reset is selected will be used as the
reference position.
7-8
The secondary position symbol is displayed as regardless of the scale. The track information for
the past six minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and
track can also be turned ON and OFF.
7.5.2 Bearing Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensors information
is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/
step gyro, the initial value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set]
button to fix it.
GYRO I/F: GYRO i/F out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO-Compass: Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO Setting: This item uses when setting to GYRO I/F or GYRO-Compass.
In the following case, GYRO Setting becomes invalid
When selecting GYRO(NMEA) in [Source].
It sets [GYRO I/F] and [GYRO(NMEA)] to [Not Use] by the device setting.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the
display panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the display panel.
Selects a heading sensor

GYRO I/F
GYRO(NMEA)
GPS-Compass
7-9
ECDIS
7.5.3 Speed Setting

a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select the log sensor. Log sensors information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
GYRO I/F: GYRO I/F out put type log is used for the ship speed sensor.
NMEA LOG: NMEA LOG out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "STW(LOG)" in the display
panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 99.9 kn.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "STW(MAN)" in the display panel.
Selects a ship speed sensor

LAN : GYRO I/F, NMEA LOG,
Local Port : GYRO I/F, GYRO(NMEA)
7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
GPS1:
No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
GPS2:
No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually.
7-10
7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
GPS1:
No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
GPS2:
No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually.
ECDIS
7-11
7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting

Color and brilliance of Screen, Dialog, Character, and Keyboard can be changed.
Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] - [(1)Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
[Color and Brilliance Setting] panel will be displayed.
2) Selects each items and it clicks [OK] button.
Setting reflects and color and brilliance are changed.
[Apply] button:
Setting can be reflected without closing [Color and Brilliance Setting Panel].
[Cancel] button: Closes [Color and Brilliance Setting] panel without reflecting setting.
[Day/Night]
Each color and brilliance can be changed collectively
by selecting the following column.
[Day Bright] (DAY1)
[Day Whiteback] (DAY2)
[Day Blackback] (DAY3)
[Dusk]
[Night]
[Color]
User Dialog: Color of dialog can be changed by selecting
from 4 colors.
Character:
Color of character can be changed by selecting

from 4 colors.
Target Symbol: Color of Target Symbol can be changed by

selecting from 6 colors.
Radar Video: Color of Radar Video can be changed by
selecting from 5 colors.
[Brilliance]
Character: Brilliance of character can be changed among
Level4 from Level1.
Keyboard: Brilliance of key of operation panel can be
changed among Level4 from Level0.
Target Symbol: Brilliance of Target Symbol can be
Radar Video: Brilliance of Radar Video panel can be
7-12
7.7 Setting the User Key

Register [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key functions.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Option Key Setting] in that order.
The [Option Key] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box. The selectable functions will be listed.
Left-click the function that is to be assigned to the user key.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
ECDIS
Selectable functions list:

Function name
Graphic Editor
Function
Starts up Graphic Editor of Route Planning.
Exit from Graphic Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.
Chart Editor
Starts up User Map Editor.

Exit User Map Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.
Chart Setting
[Chart Setting] panel opens.
Ownship/Track Setting
[Own Ship Setting] panel opens.
Save My Port List
[Save my Port List] panel opens.
My Port List
[My Port List] panel opens.
Change Active Panel (ARCS only)
Boundary of the chart is displayed.
Load Low Resolution(ARCS only)
Changes to low resolution.
Logbook
[Logbook] panel opens.
Print Display
[Print] panel opens.
Save Screen
Saves a screen.
Save Chart Setting
[Save Chart Setting] panel opens.
Chart Setting List
[Chart Setting List] panel opens.
Display Base Temporarily
Changes SENC information level to Base temporarily.
(S-57/C-MAP only)
Returns to previous level when pushing allocated user

key again.
Also, returns to previous level when moving a cursor to
menu bar or display panel and so on, too.
7-13
7.8 Setting Date/Time

When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00,
and UTC and ships local mean time (LMT) are the same.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
The Date/Time panel opens.
2) It chooses each clause eyes and it inputs value to the value entrybox..
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.
The following items can be set:
a) LMT Date/LMT Time

Set the date/time when MANUAL has been selected in the date/time data source setting.
For details, see 7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting.
Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Time Zone
Set the time difference when MANUAL has been selected in the time zone data source
setting. For details, see 7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=+, W=-)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
Time zone
LMT
7-14
3) [UTC/LMT] and [Display style] can be selected from the following item.
c) UTC/LMT
It does UTC/LMT change in the display time of the display panel.
It synchronizes with the time difference button display on the display panel.
d) Display Style
Date and time display on the display panel changes to the set format.
Y = Year, M = Month, D = Day
Note:
When an item other than MANUAL has been set in the date/time data source setting,
date/time setting procedure is not necessary.
7.9 Clear Voyage Distance

Voyage Distance can be cleared by this function.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The Question panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.
Voyage Distance isn't cleared when clicking the [Cancel] button.
7-15
ECDIS
7.10 Setting the Alarm Options

You can set the various alarm options.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
The Alarm List Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry,
enter the value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
a) Limit
Difference between POSN1 and POSN2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POSN1 and POSN2 have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
Shift of POSN1
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of
the ship is larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something
influences your ships position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the
chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
Off Course
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more
than the preset angle.
Early Course Change Indication
It is displayed only when setting TCS type in Auto Pilot.
ECC indication popup occurs when the time to the WOL arrival reaches a set value when
making setting valid.
Arrival Last WPT
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is
reduced to the amount you have set.
7-16
Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Vector Length unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 359.9 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.27.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector.
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Sector Radius unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
Low Speed Alarm
It is displayed only when setting TCS TOKIMEC category B in Auto Pilot.
When making valid, the alarm occurs when through-the-water speed declines from the set
value.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart
contacts a danger detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
Traffic separation zone
Traffic crossing
ECDIS
Traffic roundabout
Traffic precautionary
Two Way traffic
Deeper water route
Recommended traffic lane
Inshore traffic zone
Fairway
Restricted area
Caution area
Offshore production area
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
Submarine transit area
Ice area
Channel
Fishing ground
Fishing prohibited
Pipeline area
Cable area
Anchorage area
Anchorage prohibited
Spoil ground
Dumping ground
Dredge area
Cargo transshipment area
Incineration area
Specially protected area
7-17
7.11 Radar Process Setting

It sets [Video Latitude], [Video Noise Rejection], [Auto DR Control], [Process Switch], [2cd Process Mode],
[Process Switch Range], [First Target Detection] about the radar.
Select [MENU] - [Main] - [Setting] - [Radar Process Setting] in the order.
Radar Process Setting screen is displayed.
Video Latitude:
Video Latitude can be set by selecting it from [Normal], [Wide], [Narrow], [Super Wide].
Video Noise Rejection:
The level of Video Noise Rejection can be set by choosing it from [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2].
Auto DR Control:
ON/OFF of Auto DR Control can be changed.
Process Switch:
Process Switch can be set to [Distance Fix] or [Auto].
2nd Process Mode:
2nd Process Mode can be set by selecting it from [Off], [PROC1], [PROC2], [PROC3],
[PROC4], [PROC5].
Process Switch Range:
Process Range can be changed every 0.1 at up or down of the spin button.
First Target Detection:
ON/OFF of First Target Detection can be changed.
This setting becomes invalid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC1] or [PROC2].
This setting becomes valid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC3], [PROC4], [PROC5].
7.12 Language
The language to display can be selected from Japanese or English.
1) In case of making Japanese display in the normal menu.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] [Language] [Japanese] in that order.
The display language becomes Japanese.
2) In case of making English display in the normal menu.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] [Language] [English] in that order.
The display language becomes English
* In English OS, [Language] in [MENU] - [Main] isn't displayed..
7-18
7.13 Code Input

By inputting a regulated code on Code Input panel, the enhanced menu is displayed. As other functions,
"Navigation and Planning" can be ended.
Select [(7) Main] - [(5) Code Input] in that order.
The [Code Input] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input the regulated code to the input column, and push [OK] button. Then, Code Input panel is
closed, and operation corresponding to a regulated code is done. When inputting the
deregulated code, Code Input panel is closed with nothing done.
* A typing in character is displayed with "*"
Regulated code and the operation
Input Code
Function
Serviceman menu (for engineer) is displayed on Menu Title Bar.

(Original menu is disappeared on this operation. To display original menu, select
[Serviceman]-[Exit Serviceman Menu].)
* Please do not operate the serviceman menu excluding JRC serviceman.
The device might not work correctly when the setting is changed.
3) To close Code Input panel, select Cancel button.
7-19
ECDIS
7.14 Analog Correct Value

This function revises the Analog Correct Value, for example Engine RPM.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(3) Analog Correct Value] in that order.
The [Correct Value] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Select the sensor, input a correct value to each parameter column.
M/E RPM STBDRevolution per minute of Main EngineStarboard

M/E RPM PORTRevolution per minute of Main EnginePort
Propeller RPM STBDRevolution per minute of PropellerStarboard
Propeller Pitch PORTPropeller PitchPort
After inputting all the parameter, push the Set button to determine that, push the OK button.
Then, [Correct Value] dialog box will be closed.
7-20
7.15 Own ships Parameter Setting
Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.

After changing the setting, execute to exit Navigation & Planning.

Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.
7.15.1 Ships Parameter

This function sets the parameter of a ship necessary for operating ECDIS.
ECDIS

After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(4) Ships Parameter] in that order.
The [Ships Parameter] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.
3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then, Information message is displayed.
4) Exit to Navigation & Planning and start again.
7-21
7.15.2 CCRP Setting

This function sets the parameter of the position of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) and the
position of each sensor.
After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(3) Installation]-[(2) CCRP Setting] in that order.
The [CCRP Setting] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.
GPS / Radar Antenna:

Input the position according
to the installed environment,
and change to ON the check
box in using the sensor.
CCRP:
Set the position of CCRP.
Set the radio button of the
item used effectively though
four places can be set.
3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then,

Information message is displayed.
4) Exit to Navigation & Planning and start again.
7-22
7.16 Line Monitor

Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(1) Line Monitor] in that order.
The Line Monitor panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be
displayed in the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected
external device will be displayed in the output data display box in real time.
Left-click on the
[Stop] button to stop information from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear
the currently displayed information. If there is no inputting/outputting of data between the
ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will be displayed in the data display box.
ECDIS
7-23
7.17 Adjust Radar Bearing, Range

and Antenna Height
This function adjusts [Bearing], [Range] and [Antenna height].

Select [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(2)Adjust].The Adjust panel opens.
2) Input or select a value to each item, or adjust that with
Bearing Adjustment:
The value is input and bearing is
adjusted.
Range Adjustment:
The value is input and range is
adjusted.
Antenna Height:
Selects from the drop-down list
and antenna height is adjusted.
3) After setting all items, push the [Close] button.
7-24
Tip of RADAR Range and Bearing
Adjusting Bearing
Expand the screen display. Then, adjust Heading echo to Bearing.
Heading echo
ECDIS
Adjusting Range
Expand the screen display. If there is the hole of own ships echo,
adjust Range smaller until the hole disappears.
Hole of own
ships echo
7-25
7.18 Installation Information

This function sets the installation information.
Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(1) Installation Information] in that order.
The Installation Information panel will be displayed.
2) Input a value to each column.
Date: Input an installed date.

Name:
Input an administrator name.
Company:
Input the company name.
3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.

7-26
7.19 TCS Maintenance

This function sets [Reach Offset], [Safety / Limit Check] setting and [Time / Distance to WPT] setting
about the TCS.
Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(5) TCS Maintenance] in that order.
The TCS Maintenance panel will be displayed.
2) Input or select setting to each item.
Reach Offset:
Input a reach offset of TCS.
Safety / Limit Check:
On: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
checked.
Off: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
not checked.
ECDIS
Time / Distance to WPT

From center point of WOL:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between own ship and center
point of WOL.
From cross point of WOL and heading:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between center point of heading
of own ship and WOL.
3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.
7-27
7.20 Radar Initial Setup

This function sets [Echo Noise Level] of [Signal Processing], [MBS Level] and [MBS Area] about the
radar.
1) Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(5)Code Input] in that order.
2) The Code Input panel opens. After inputting [0], left-click [OK] button.
3) Select [Menu] - [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(6)Radar Initial Setup]
4) The Radar Initial Setup panel opens.
.
5) Input a value to each item or adjust that with
Signal Processing: Setting the echo noise level of Signal Processing.
MBS: Setting the level and area of Main Bang Suppression.
Echo Noise Level:
Echo Noise Level can be set between
from 0 to 255.
Setting Mode:
On/Off of Setting Mode can be changed.
MBS Level:
MBS Level can be set between from 0 to
255.
MBS Area:
MBS area can be set between from 0 to
255.
6) Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.
7-28
7.21 Data Backup/Restore
This function is backup and restore of setting data.

Data can be backed up to the following devices.
Backup Drive(DVD Drive)
Floppy Disk
USB Device
7-29
ECDIS
7.21.1 How to backup the data

It explains the data backup procedure as follows.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel, Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data
Backup/Restore] - [(1) Backup] in that order.
The Data Backup/Restore panel will be displayed.
2) Select destination device from drop-down button a.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box b, and left-click the [COPY>>] button (c) to
start backup.
Left-click [Select All] button (d) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box e.
a)
f)
g)
b)
c)
e)
d)
* [Type (f)] and [Source drive (g)] cant be changed.
7-30
7.21.2 How to restore the data

It explains the data restore procedure as follows.
1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel, Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data
Backup/Restore] - [(2) Restore] in that order.
The Data Backup/Restore panel will be displayed.
2) Select source device from drop-down button a.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box b, and left-click the [<<COPY] button (c) to
start restore.
Left-click [Select All] button (d) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box e.
e)
a)
f)
b)
e)
c)
d)
* [Type (f)] and [Destination drive (g)] cant be changed.
7-31
ECDIS
7-32
Playback
8-1
In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for
Navigation & Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning
screen except for the [(9) Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some
submenus you cannot use in the Playback.
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback

(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the
in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the Staring Date/Time
panel is displayed.
Note:
The mode selected last ([Navigation & Planning] in case of ECDIS, [Conning Display] in case
of Conning Display) will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.
8 Playback
8-2
Display panels for playback operation

[For S-57/C-MAP]
[For ARCS]
ECDIS
8-3
8 Playback
Special menu for playback:

In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback, [(8)
Playback] is used, instead.
Displays the Starting Date/Time panel.

Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.
Turns ON/OFF the Playback panel.
Table 9 Playback Menu Tree

Main Menu
(1) AIS/TT
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Reference
(1) TT1
3.3.9.1
(2) TT2
3.3.9.1
(3) AIS
3.3.9.1
(4) All
3.3.9.1
(6) All List
3.3.9.2
(7) Select List
3.3.9.8
(2) Route
(0) Setting
4.1.1
(4) Ownship/Track
(0) Setting
3.28
(5) User Map
(1) Select User Map
3.13
(2) Unselect User Map
3.13
(6) Chart
(2) Off Center

(3) User Setting
(1) Enter Position
3.4.5
(2) Home
3.4.1
3.8.1
(2) My Port List
3.8.2
3.29.3
3.29.4
3.9
(5) Fix View
3.7.3
3.31
(3) Chart Abbreviation
3.30
(4) ARCS
(0) Setting
(7) Main
(1) EBL Maneuver/
3.10.9
3.10.10
3.10.10
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
3.29.1
(2) Other Chart
3.29.2
3.20
Remove EBL Maneuver
8 Playback
(2) Cross Bearing
3.21
(5) Print
3.37
(6) Save Screen
3.38
(2) File Manager
7.1
8-4
Table 9 Playback Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(7) Main
Submenu
(3) Test
(0) Setting
Submenu/Option
(1) Alarm Log
3.3.7
7.2
(3) Operating Time
7.3
7.6
7.7
(4) Marker Setting
(8) Playback
Reference
3.16.2.1
3.25
(0) Buzzer Volume
3.3.5
(1) Starting Date/Time
8.2
(2) Start
8.2
(3) Pause
8.2
(4) Stop
8.2
(5) Playback Panel
8.2
(0) Exit
8.1
(2) Exiting the Playback

1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation &
Planning screen.
ECDIS
8-5
8 Playback
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data

(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the Starting Date/Time panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)
Logging data drop-down list*1
Date and time of recording end
Date and time of recording start
Selection of date and time to be played

2
back*
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)
*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were
recorded are displayed.
2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK]
button.
(2) Displaying the Playback Panel

1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the Playback panel panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is
ON, the panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button
[Start] Button
[Stop] Button
[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the
Start Date/Time panel as shown above.
[Playback Speed Select] Button
Left-click this drop-down list button and then
select the playback speed you want by left-clicking it.
Even if the Playback Panel panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from
the menu.
8 Playback
8-6
(3) Start and stop of playback

1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the Playback Panel.
Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging
data.
Playback Statues:
Stop:
During playback:
When paused:
2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.

To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again.
ECDIS
8-7
8 Playback
8 Playback
8-8
Reference
9-1
9.1 Alarm Function

(1) No Alarm
Category*1
No Alarm
Message*2
No Alarm
Alarm Type*3
Alarm
Colour*3
Buzzer Type*4
Normal State
Green
Silent
Meaning*5
Condition*6
No Alarm
(2) System Alarm

Category*1
Message*2
Alarm Type*3
Alarm
Colour*3
Buzzer Type*4
Meaning*5
Condition*6
POSN1 (primary) is defective or

communication line is cut.
POSN1 is not fixed.
Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
POSN2 (secondary) is defective or
POSN2 is not fixed.
Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
The shift amount of the primary
position exceeds the limit being set.
Position measuring
instrument is
connected
(including DR).
No.1
Position
Data Alarm
POSN 1(Data)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
POSN1 not fix

POSN1(NON-WGS84)
Alarm
Alarm
Red
Red
System Alarm
System Alarm
No.2
Position
Data Alarm
POSN 2(Data)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
POSN2 not fix

POSN2(NON-WGS84)
Alarm
Alarm
Red
Red
System Alarm
System Alarm
No.1
POSN1 shifted
Position Shift
Alarm
Position
Position difference
Difference
exceed
Alarm
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
The difference between the primary

and second positions exceeds the
limit being set.
User setting.
Position measuring
instrument is
connected to
POSN2
(including DR).
Radar Data
Alarm
PROC(AZI)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
During radar
display
PROC(HL)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
PROC(Trigger)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
PROC(Video)
RIB(Data)
Alarm
Alarm
Red
Red
System Alarm
System Alarm
PROC(Reverse)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
PROC(INT)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
ASIC1 to Radar
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
TT(Data)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
SRB(Data)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
Gyro I/F(Gyro)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
Rotation signal (BP) is out of

specifications.
Rotation signal (BZ) is out of
specifications.
Trigger signal is out of specifications
or signal line is cut.
Video signal is out of specifications.
Error occurred in the radar interface
board.
Error by reverse-rotation in the signal
processing part.
Error in interrupting of stun in the
signal processing part.
Error in interrupting from ASIC1 to
radar DSP
Target Track is defective or signal
line is cut.
Error occurred in the serial relay
board
Gyro is defective.
Heading(Data)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
Error occurred in the heading data of

gyro interface or its line is cut.
LOG Data
Alarm
Gyro I/F(Log)
Log(Data)
Alarm
Alarm
Red
Red
System Alarm
System Alarm
Log is
connected.
Autopilot
Data Alarm
Autopilot(DATA)
Alarm
Red
System Alarm
Log is defective.
Error occurred in the log data of log
interface or its line is cut.
Autopilot is defective or
Hardware
Alarm
Fan(CPU)
CPU High Temperature
Fan(Main PWR)
Fan(ATX PWR)
Fan(LCD)
Disk1 Error
Disk2 Error
AC offline
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
System Alarm
CPU fan is defective.

CPU temperature is rising.
Main power supply fan is defective.
ATX power supply fan is defective.
LCD fan is defective.
Disk1 is defective.
Disk2 is defective.
AC power is offline.
Always
Target Track
Data Alarm
SRB Data
Alarm
GYRO Data
Alarm
Reference
9-2
Position measuring
instrument is
connected
(including DR).
User setting
During TT
display
Always
Gyro is
connected.
Autopilot is
connected.
(3) Nav. Alarm

Message*2
Alarm Type*3
Alarm
Colour*3
Crossing Safety Contour
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
[V] Crossing Safety Contour within

set time.
Vector = ON
(User setting)
Approaching Obstruction
Alarm
Red
[S] Approaching obstruction
Sector=ON
(User setting)
Approaching Under
water rock
Approaching Wreck
Alarm
Red
Alarm
Red
Dangerous Symbol
Alarm
Red
Approaching Buoy/Light
Alarm
Red
Arrived at WPT
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Actual course change
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Off Course
Alarm
Red
XTD
Alarm
Arrived at LAST WPT
Category*1
Safety
contour
Alarm
Dangerous
Alarm
Route
Monitoring
Alarm
Buzzer Type*4
Meaning*5
Condition*6
[S] Approaching under-water rock

[S] Approaching wreck
[S] Approaching wreck
Approaching Buoy/Light
Arrived at the WPT.
During Normal
route navigation
During TCS route
navigation
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
[A] Necessary to change in the

course. (It occurs before by 30
seconds which arrive at WOL.)
The difference between the course
and bearing exceeds the limit.
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
The amount of the cross track error

exceeds the limit.
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Arrived at the last WPT on the sailing

final leg.
Automatic sailing failed
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Call-back navigator
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - High
Alarm
Red
Lost
Alarm
Red
LAT. Limit
Over Alarm
LAT. Limit Over
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Automatic sailing cannot be

continued.
By one of the following causes:
POSN1 error
GYRO error
Route error
[A] Outputs a callback navigator
alarm.
ARR alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
Route alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
[AIS/TT] CPA(Closet Point of
Approach) or TCPA(Time to CPA)
[AIS/TT] Target is lost.
Anchor
Alarm
Dragging anchor
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Timer Alarm
Timer
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Time out
Timer=ON
(User setting)
Chart Alarm
Loaded different datum

chart
Loaded unknown datum
chart
Chart image is Zoom out
Alarm
Red
Different datum chart is loaded.
Always
Alarm
Red
Red
ARCS Alarm Security failed
Alarm
Red
[ARCS] Unknown datum chart is

loaded.
[ARCS] Low-resolution chart is
displayed.
[ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS
security occurred.
Chat type =
ARCS
Alarm
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Not up to date
Alarm
Red
Traffic separation zone
Alarm
Red
Traffic Crossing
Alarm
Red
Traffic roundabout
Alarm
Red
Traffic precautionary
Alarm
Red
Two way traffic
Alarm
Red
Navigation
Alarm - Low
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
[ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS

updated.
[V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone
within set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within
set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout
within set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary
within set time.
[V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within
set time.
Target Alarm CPA/TCPA
Area Alarm
9-3
During route
navigation and
Alarm Setting =
ON
(User setting)
During automatic
sailing
AIS/TT display =
ON
Limit Over Latitude on own ship.

83 00.000'N
83 00.000S
Crossing anchor circle
Always
Anchor
circle=ON
See 10.2.1
Alarm Information of ARCS
Chart.
Vector=ON
(User setting)
Alarm item=ON
(User setting)
Reference
ECDIS
(3) Nav. Alarm - Continued

Alarm Type*3
Alarm
Colour*3
Deeper water route
Alarm
Red
Recommended traffic
lane
Inshore traffic zone
Alarm
Red
Alarm
Red
Fairway
Alarm
Red
Restricted area
Alarm
Red
Caution area
Alarm
Red
Offshore production
area
Military practice area
Alarm
Red
Alarm
Red
Seaplane landing area
Alarm
Red
Submarine transit area
Alarm
Red
Ice area
Alarm
Red
Channel
Alarm
Red
Fishing ground
Alarm
Red
Fishing prohibited
Alarm
Red
Pipeline area
Alarm
Red
Cable area
Alarm
Red
Anchorage area
Alarm
Red
Anchorage prohibited
Alarm
Red
Spoil ground
Alarm
Red
Dumping ground
Alarm
Red
Dredge area
Alarm
Red
Cargo transshipment
area
Incineration area
Alarm
Red
Alarm
Red
Specially protected area
Alarm
Red
Dangerous line
Alarm
Red
Dangerous Area
Alarm
Red
Category*1
Area Alarm
Message*2
Buzzer Type*4
Meaning*5
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
Navigation
Alarm - Mid
[V] Crossing Deeper Water Route

within set time.
[V] Crossing Recommended Traffic
Lane within set time.
[V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone
within set time.
[V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
Condition*6
Vector=ON
(User setting)
Alarm item=ON
(User setting)
[V] Crossing Restricted Area within

set time.
[V] Crossing Caution Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Shore Production Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Military Practice Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Submarine transit Area
within set time.
[V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Channel within set time.
[V] Crossing Fishing Ground within
set time.
[V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited
within set time.
[V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Cable Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Area within
set time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited
within set time.
[V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set
time.
[V] Crossing Dumping Ground within
set time.
[V] Crossing Dredge Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment
Area within set
[V] Crossing Incineration Area within
set time.
[V] Crossing Specially Protected
Areas within set time.
[V] Crossing Dangerous Line within
set time.
[V] Crossing Dangerous Area within
set time.
(4) INFO/Warning
Category*1
Information
Message*2
Set Gyro
POSN1 not select
Safety contour not set
Shallow contour not set
Deep contour not set
Safety depth not set
Reference
Alarm Type*3
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Invalid
Information
Alarm
Colour*3
Buzzer Type*4
Meaning*5
Operation Miss Setting up is not completed.

Setting Alarm Initial course for step/synchronize
gyro is not set.
Setting Alarm POSN1 is unsetting.
Safety contour value is not set
(default value unchanged).
Setting Alarm
Shallow contour value is not set
Setting Alarm Deep contour value is not set
Setting Alarm Safety depth value is not set
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
9-4
Condition*6
Always
(5) INFO/Warning - continued

Category*1
Information
Warning
Alarm Type*3
Alarm
Colour*3
AIS Max Target
Information
Blue
AIS 95% Capacity
Information
Blue
AIS ACT Max
Information
Blue
AIS ACT 95% Capacity
Information
Blue
POSN1(HDOP)
Warning
Yellow
POSN2(HDOP)
Warning
Yellow
Loading Non-HO chart.
Warning
Yellow
Over scale.
Warning
Yellow
Larger scale available.

ENC data are available.
Position shift.
Warning
Warning
Warning
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Chart shift.
Chart shift to WGS84.
Warning
Warning
Yellow
Yellow
POSN1 not differential.
Warning
Yellow
POSN2 not differential.
Warning
Yellow
Fix View.
No ENC available
Warning
Warning
Yellow
Yellow
Customized display
Warning
Yellow
Alarm Type*3
Alarm
Colour*3
Invalid Data
Operation Miss
Blue
No Object
Operation Miss
None
Echo OFF
Operation Miss
None
Not Allowed
Max Point
Operation Miss
Operation Miss
None
None
Message*2
Buzzer Type*4
Meaning*5
Condition*6
Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed

maximum number.
Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed to
95% or more of maximum number.
Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed maximum number.
Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed to 95% or more of
maximum number.
Silent
HDOP increase in primary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
Silent
HDOP increase in secondary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
Silent
[ENC]Selecting Chart that is not
Official. (ex. C-MAP)
Silent
[ENC]Two expansion displays were
multiplied from the reduced scale of
the chart when the ship moves to
another chart.
Silent
Larger scale available.
Silent
ENC data are available.
Silent
Ships position is shifted by Offset
function.
Silent
[ARCS]Chart shift.
Silent
[ARCS] Selecting Chart that is not
datum on WGS84.
Silent
The quality indicator of POSN1 is
things except 1".
Silent
The quality indicator of POSN2 is
things except 1".
Silent
[ENC]Selecting Fix View
Silent
[ENC] The chart at the ship position
is No ENC
Silent
At lease I Standard Category
checkbox in S57/C-MAP
Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 is not checked
AIS/TT display =
ON
(6) Operation Miss

Category*1
Operation
Miss
Message*2
Buzzer Type*4
Meaning*5
Condition*6
ECDIS
Operation Miss The operation for which data was

necessary was done with there no
position data.
Operation Miss The spot without the object was
selected.
Operation Miss Echo is off because offset limit of
Radar echo was over.
Operation Miss Invalid operation
Operation Miss Entered information beyond the
specification
Note:
Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.
9-5
Reference
Remarks:
*1: Category
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)
When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description
of the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the
Alarm button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking alarm
stops and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the Alarm
List panel. The Alarm List panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.
Alarm button
[Alarm List] button
Alarm display
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]
Button/Panel
/Buzzer
Alarm button
Attribution
Alarm
Icon on Status
Icon on Log
display
of Alarm List panel
of Alarm List Panel
Buzzer
Not acknowledged
Red blinking
Stay red
Red blinking
Red blinking
Generated
Acknowledged
Not indicate
Stay red
Stay red
Stay red
Silent
Invalid Information
Blue blinking
Stay blue
Stay blue
Stay blue
Generated
Information with low integrity/ Warning
Not indicate
Stay yellow
Stay yellow
Stay yellow
Silent
Normal State
Stay green
Stay green
Silent
Alarm
*3: An alarm shown in the Alarm List panel.

*4: Audible sound from the dedicated keyboard. The sounding pattern varies with the type of alarm.
Volume of the alarm is changeable every type. ([(7)Main] [(0)Setting] [(0) Buzzer Setting])
*5: [A]: Alarm used for TCS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*6: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.
Reference
9-6
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information

9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to
display these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a
malfunction of ECDIS. JRCs ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and
display such alarm information.
Alarm Information of ARCS chart
Measures to take
Timing and place of

displaying error message
No.
Error message
ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file

have been altered. You may be in breach
of the licensing arrangements that relate
to the use of the chart.
License is invalid. Please contact your
ARCS agent/ distributor to correct this
error.
Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the

authorized license (Chart Permit). Your
license has been falsified, so it is invalid.
Displayed in Chart Portfolio

when Navigation & Planning is
started, when ARCS Information of User Maintenance
Menu is checked, and when
the chart is imported.
ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit

corrupted. Please reload original media.
Register Chart Permit again. Chart

Permit is in abnormal state. If the
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

when the chart is imported
ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update

information relates to a newer version of
the chart. Please load the chart CD that
contain Chart# with an issue date of
RCID.
Import data from the latest chart CD and

update CD. The chart version of the
update CD does not match the imported
chart version.

ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data

already incorporates this update information. Please load the latest update CD.
Import data from the latest chart CD and

update CD. The data on the current
update CD is already imported.

ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired updating is not permitted. Please contact
your agent to re-new license.
Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.

Your license has already expired, so
updating is not permitted.

(only for Navigator Service
Edition)
ARCS08 Warning - License expired in

less than one month. Please contact your
ARCS agent for a license renewal.

Your license (Chart Permit) will expire in
less than a month.
Displayed in the panel when

the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)
ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License

expired. The displayed chart may not be
up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange
for a license renewal.

One month has not passed yet since the
expiry date of your license (Chart Permit).

ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired.

ARCS charts can not be displayed.
Contact your ARCS agent for a license
renewal.

One month or more has passed since the
expiry date of your license (Chart Permit).
The chart is not displayed.

ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded

version of this chart is too old to be used
with the license. Please load a more
recent version of the chart. Chart version
is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#.
Import the latest license and chart CD.

The chart encryption version number does
not match the encryption version number
of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.

9-7
Reference
ECDIS
Alarm Information of ARCS chart (continued)

Timing and place of
displaying error message
No.
Error message
Measures to take
10
ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too

old to be used with this version of the
chart. Please contact your agent to obtain
a new license.

The chart encryption version number does
not match the encryption version number
of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.

11
Larger Scale available
More detailed charts than the currently

displayed chart can be displayed.
Larger-scale charts than the currently
displayed chart exist.
Displayed in the message area

when the chart is displayed
12
Chart Shift
Note that the currently displayed chart

position is shifted. The display position
of the current chart is shifted in
accordance with user-defined setting.

13
Chart Shift To WGS84
Note that the currently displayed chart

position is shifted. The displayed chart is
not of the WGS-84 geodetic system, but it
is displayed in accordance with WGS-84
while the offset value of chart data is used
as reference.

14
WGS84 position cannot be related

accurately to chart Chart#.
Note that the geodetic system of the

currently displayed chart does not
conform to WGS-84. An offset value is
not set to WGS-84, so the chart cannot be
shifted to WGS-84.

15
Loading different datum chart
Note that the geodetic system of the

currently displayed chart is not WGS-84.
A chart of a non-WGS-84 geodetic system
is displayed.

16
Loaded unknown datum chart
Note that the currently displayed chart is

of an unknown geodetic system. A chart
whose geodetic system is not set in chart
data is displayed.

17
PIN Error
Check for the Personal Identification

Number (PIN). The entered PIN is not
correct.
Displayed in the panel when a

PIN is entered at start of
18
Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit

corrupted. Please reload original media.
Register Chart Permit again. Chart

Permit is in abnormal state. If the
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

Note 1 : # in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.

Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is
provided for the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service
only.
Reference
9-8
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart

This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is
displayed on ECDIS.
No.
Error message
Measures to take
C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed.
License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart
Portfolio.
C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please

contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal.
The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute

after it is started. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license
renewal.
C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at

DD/MM/YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent
for a license renewal.
The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than

2 months. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found.
C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press

[POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then, press [POWER]
again to start the equipment.
C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error
Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the

software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error
An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the

software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
ECDIS
9-9
Reference
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart

This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart
Portfolio while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.
When Base CD is used
No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
error(0x00000001)
error: File not found
A chart defined in the catalog

file on the chart CD is not
found.
This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The

chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
error(0x00000002)
error: File Length
A catalog file on the chart CD

contains a data length error.

error(0x00000003)
error: File extention
The chart CD contains a file

extension error.

error(0x00000004)
error: File count
A chart file is found on the

chart CD.

error(0x00000005)
error: Data not found
Specified data is not found on

the chart CD.

error(0x00000006)
error: Data error

data error.

error(0x00000007)
error: CRC
A chart file on the chart CD

contains a CRC value error.

error(0x00000008)
error: Exchange
The chart CD contains an

exchange target data error.

error(0x00000009)
error: Data structure

structure error.

Reference
9-10
When Base CD is used (continued)

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
10
error(0x0000000A)
error: Attribute
The attribute value of an

object defined in a chart file
on the chart CD is incorrect.

11
error(0x0000000B)
error: Instruction
Address
Internal memory address

error (instruction section)
Contact selling agency of chart.
12
error(0x0000000C)
error: Instruction offset
Internal memory offset error

(instruction section)
13
error(0x0000000D)
error: PL Rule Memory
Memory allocation error (PL

rule section)
14
error(0x0000000E)
error: PL Rule
Information
Data acquisition error (PL

rule section)
15
error(0x0000000F)
error: Attribute
Information
Chart-object attribute
acquisition error
16
error(0x00000010)
error: Enc File write
SENC file write error
17
error(0x00000011)
error: Object Class get
Chart-object information
acquisition error
18
error(0x00000012)
error: Directory create
File path error
19
error(0x00000013)
error: Topology
A chart object on the chart

CD contains a topology error.

20
error(0x00000014)
error: Area Object Link
A chart area object on the

chart CD contains a link error.

21
error(0x00000015)
error: Line Object Link
A line object on the chart CD

contains a link error.

22
error(0x00000016)
error: Object outside
range
A chart object on the chart

CD is beyond the boundary.

9-11
Reference
ECDIS
When Update CD is used

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
error(0x00000001)
error: Memory get
Memory allocation error
error(0x00000002)
error: Index get
Chart index acquisition error
An index needs to be created again. Index creation may

take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
error(0x00000003)
error: File not found
SENC file is not found.
An index needs to be created again. Index creation may

take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
error(0x00000004)
error: CRC
A chart file on the chart CD

contains a CRC value error.
This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This

chart cannot be updated.
error(0x00000005)
error: Exchange
The update CD contains an

exchange target data error.

error(0x00000006)
The update CD contains a file

structure error.

error(0x00000007)
error: Data not found
A chart defined in a catalog

file on the update CD is not
found.

error(0x00000008)
error: Object not found
A SENC chart object name is

not found.

error(0x00000009)
error: Chart Cell size
SENC chart-file size

acquisition error
10
error(0x0000000A)
error: Chart Cell data
SENC chart file acquisition

error
11
error(0x0000000B)
error: Warning Cell size
SENC warning-file size

acquisition error
12
error(0x0000000C)
error: Warning Cell data
SENC warning file

acquisition error
13
error(0x0000000D)
error: Sequential
number error
The update CD contains an

update number sequence
error.

Reference
9-12
When Update CD is used (continued)

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
14
error(0x0000000E)
error: Object index
An update chart on the

update CD contains an object
index error.

15
error(0x0000000F)
error: Attribute
information

update CD contains an
attribute information error.

16
error(0x00000010)
error: Attribute

update CD contains an
attribute value error.

17
error(0x00000011)
error: Instruction
Address
Internal memory address

error (instruction section)
18
error(0x00000012)
error: Instruction Offset
Internal memory offset error

(instruction section)
19
error(0x00000013)
error: PL Rule Memory
Memory allocation error (PL

rule section)
20
error(0x00000014)
error: PL Rule
Information
Data acquisition error (PL

rule section)
21
error(0x00000015)
error: Enc File write
SENC file write error
22
error(0x00000016)
error: Object Class get
Chart-object information
acquisition error
23
error(0x00000017)
The update CD contains a

data structure error.

24
error(0x00000018)
error: FFPC delete

data structure error (FFPC
field deletion).

25
error(0x00000019)
error: FFPC edit

data structure error (FFPC
field change).

26
error(0x0000001A)
error: FSPC delete

data structure error (FSPC
field deletion).

9-13
Reference
ECDIS

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
27
error(0x0000001B)
error: FSPC edit

data structure error (FSPC
field change).

28
error(0x0000001C)
error: VRPC delete

data structure error (VRPC
field deletion).

29
error(0x0000001D)
error: VRPC edit

data structure error (VRPC
field change).

30
error(0x0000001E)
error: SGCC delete

data structure error (SGCC
field deletion).

31
error(0x0000001F)
error: SGCC edit

data structure error (SGCC
field change).

32
error(0x00000020)
error: Coordinate Type

data structure error
(coordinate type).

33
error(0x00000021)
error: Directory create
File path error
34
error(0x00000022)
error: Topology
A chart object on the update

CD contains a topology error.

35
error(0x00000023)
Area Object Link
A chart area object on the

update CD contains a link
error.

36
error(0x00000024)
error: Line Object Link
A chart line object on the

update CD contains a link
error.
This error is not fatal.

Reference
9-14

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
37
error(0x00000025)
error: Object outside
range
A chart object on the update

CD is beyond the boundary.

38
error(0x00000026)
error: point

chart point object error.

39
error(0x00000027)
error: Edition number
Chart CD Edition number

error

ECDIS
9-15
Reference
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System

No.
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Abbreviation
WGS-72
WGS-84
EUR
ADI
AFG
AIN
ANO
AIA
ARF
ARS
ASC
ATF
SHB
TRN
ASQ
AUA
AUG
PHA
IBE
BER
BID
BOO
BUR
CAZ
CAI
CAO
CAP
CAC
CGE
CHI
CHU
COA
DAL
BAT
GIZ
EAS
EUS
FOT
GAA
GEO
GRA
GUA
GSE
DOB
HEN
HJO
HKD
HTN
IND
INF
INH
TRL
ISG
IST
JOH
Reference
Des cription
World Geodetic Sys tem 1972
World Geodetic Sys tem 1984
European 1950
Adindan
Afgooye
Ain el Abd 1970
Anna 1 As tro 1965
Antigua Is land As tro 1943
Arc 1950
Arc 1960
As cens ion Is land 1958
As tro beacon "E" 1945
As tro DOS 71/4
As tro Tern Is land (FRIG) 1961
As tronom ical Station 1952
Aus tralian Geodetic 1966
Aus tralian Geodetic 1984
Ayabelle Lighthous e
Bellevue (IGN)
Berm uda 1957
Bis s au
Bogota Obs ervatory
Bukit Rim pah
Cam p Area As tro
Cam po Inchaus pe 1969
Canton As tro 1966
Cape
Cape Canaveral
Carthage
Chatam Is land As tro 1971
Chua As tro
Corrego Alegre
Dabola
Djakarta (Batavia)
DOS 1968
Eas ter Is land 1967
European 1979
Fort Thom as 1955
Gan 1970
Geodetic Datum 1949
Gracios a Bas e SW 1948
Guam 1963
Gunung Segara
GUX 1 As tro
Herat North
Hjors ey 1955
Hong Kong 1963
Hu-Tzu-Shan
Indian Indian 1954
Indian 1975
Ireland 1965
ISTS 061
As tro 1968
ISTS 073 As tro 1969
Johns ton Is land 1961
No.
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Abbreviation
KAN
KEG
KEA
KUS
LCF
LEH
LIB
LUZ
MIK
MAS
MER
MID
MIN
ASM
MPO
NAH
NAP
NAS
NAR
FLO
OEG
OHA
FAH
OGB
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
PLN
PIT
PTB
PTN
POS
PRP
HIT
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
114
115
PUR
QAT
QUO
REU
MOD
SAE
SAO
SAP
SCK
SGM
SAN
SOA
TAN
TIL
TOY
TDC
MVS
ENW
WAK
YAC
ZAN
PUK
SPK
9-16
Des cription
Kandawala
Kerguelen Is land 1949
Kertau 1948
Kus aie As tro 1951
L. C. 5 As tro 1961
Leigon
Liberia 1964
Luzon
Mahe 1971
Mas s awa
Merchich
Midway As tro 1961
Minna
Monts errat Is land As tro 1958
M'Poraloko
Nahrwan
Naparim a, BWI
North Am erican 1927
North Am erican 1983
Obs ervatorio Meteorologico 1939
Old Egyptian 1907
Old Hawaiian
Om an
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
1936
Pico de las Nieves
Pitcairn As tro 1967
Point 58
Pointe Noire 1948
Porto Santo 1936
Provis ional South Am erican 1956
Provis ional South Chilean 1963
(als o known as Hito XVIII 1963)
Puerto Rico
Qatar national
Qornoq
Reunion
Rom e 1940
Santo (DOS) 1965
Sao Braz
Sapper Hill 1943
Schwarzeck
Selvagem Grande 1938
South Am erican 1969
South As ia
Tananarive Obs ervatory 1925
Tim balai 1948
Tokyo
Tris tan As tro 1968
Viti Levu 1916
Wake-Eniwetok 1960
Wake Is land As tro 1952
Yacare
Zanderij
Pulkovo 1942
S-42 (Pulkovo 1942)
9.4
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations

Term
Acknowledge
Acquire, Acquisition
Acquisition Zone
Adjust, Adjustment
Abbreviation
ACK
ACQ
AZ
ADJ
Aft
AFT
Alarm
ALARM
Altitude
ALT
Amplitude Modulation
Anchor Watch
Antenna
Anti Clutter Rain
Anti Clutter Sea
April
Audible
August
Automatic
Automatic Frequency Control
Automatic Gain Control
Automatic Identification
System
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Autopilot
AP
Auxiliary System/Function
Available
Azimuth Indicator
Background
Bearing
Bearing Waypoint To Waypoint
Bow Crossing Range
Bow Crossing Time
Brilliance
Built in Test Equipment
Calibrate
Cancel
Carried (for example, carried
EBL origin)
Central Processing Unit
Centre
Term
Abbreviation
CHG
CP
CLR
CPA
AM
ANCH
ANT
RAIN
SEA
APR
AUD
AUG
AUTO
AFC
AGC
Change
Circularly Polarised
Clear
Closest Point of Approach
Compact Disk Read Only
Memory
Consistent Common Reference
Point
Consistent Common Reference
System
Contrast
Coordinated Universal Time
Correction
Course
Course Over the Ground
Course Through the Water
Course To Steer
Course Up
Cross Track Distance
Cursor
Dangerous Goods
CONT
UTC
CORR
CRS
COG
CTW
CTS
C UP
XTD
CURS
DG
AIS
Date
DATE
ARPA
DAY
AUX
AVAIL
AZI
BKGND
BRG
BWW
BCR
BCT
BRILL
BITE
CAL
CNCL
Day
Dead Reckoning, Dead Reckoned
Position
December
Decrease
Delay
Delete
Departure
Depth
Destination
Deviation
Differential GLONASS
Differential GNSS
Differential GPS
Digital Selective Calling
DEC
DECR
DELAY
DEL
DEP
DPTH
DEST
DEV
DGLONASS
DGNSS
DGPS
DSC
Display
DISP
CPU
CENT
Distance
Distance Root Mean Square
DIST
DRMS
9-17
CDROM
CCRP
CCRS
DR
ECDIS
Reference
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)
Term
Abbreviation
E
REF
EBL
Term
Global Maritime Distress and
Safety System
Global Navigation Satellite
System
Global Orbiting Navigation
Satellite System
Global Positioning System
Great Circle
Grid
GPS
GC
GRID
ECDIS
Ground
GND
ECS
ENC
EPFS
ERBL
Grounding Avoidance System

Group Repetition Interval
Guard Zone
Gyro
Harmful Substances(applies
to AIS)
Head Up
Heading
Heading Control System
Heading Line
High Frequency
High Speed Craft
Horizontal Dilution Of
Precision
GAS
GRI
GZ
GYRO
Distance To Go
DTG
Drift
DRIFT
Dropped(for example, dropped EBL

origin)
East
Echo Reference
Electronic Bearing Line
Electronic Chart Display and
Information System
Electronic Chart System
Electronic Navigational Chart
Electronic Position Fixing System
Electronic Range and Bearing Line
Emergency Position Indicating Radio
Beacon
Enhance
Enter
Equipment
Error
Estimated Position
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time of Departure
EPIRB
ENH
ENT
EQUIP
ERR
EP
ETA
ETD
Abbreviation
GMDSS
GNSS
GLONASS
HS
H UP
HDG
HCS
HL
HF
HSC
HDOP
European Geo-Stationary
Navigational Overlay System
Event
Exclusion Zone
External
F - Band (applies to Radar)
February
Foreword
Fishing Vessel
Fix
Forward
Frequency
Frequency Modulation
EGNOS
I - Band
I-Band
EVENT
EZ
EXT
F-Band
FEB
FWD
FISH
FIX
FWD
FREQ
FM
ID
IN
INCR
IND
INFO
INF RED
INIT
INP
I/O
IBS
INS
Full
FULL
Gain
Geographics
Geometric Dilution Of Precision
GAIN
GEOG
GDOP
Identification
In
Increase
Indication
Information
Infrared
Initialization
Input
Input/Output
Integrated Bridge System
Integrated Navigation System
Integrated Radio
Communication System
Interference Rejection
Interswitch
Interval
Reference
9-18
IRCS
IR
ISW
INT
Term
January
July
June
Label
Latitude
Latitude/Longitude
Leeway
Limit
Line Of Position
Log
Long Pulse
Long Range
Longitude
Loran
Lost Target LOST
Abbreviation
JAN
JUL
JUN
LBL
LAT
L/L
LWY
LIM
LOP
LOG
LP
LR
LON
LORAN
LOST TGT
North
North Up
Not Less Than
Not More Than
Not Under Command
November
October
Off
Officer On Watch
Offset
On
Out/Output
Own Ship
Panel Illumination
Parallel Index Line
Low Frequency
LF
Past Positions
Magnetic
Man Overboard
Manoeuvre
Manual
MAG
MOB
MVR
MAN
Map(s)
MAP
March
Maritime Mobile Services Identity
number
Maritime Pollutant (applies to AIS)
MAR
Passenger Vessel
Performance Monitor
Permanent
Person Overboard
Personal Identification
Number
Pilot Vessel
MMSI
Port/Portside
PORT
MP
POSN
Maritime Safety Information
MSI
Marker
Master
Maximum
MKR
MSTR
MAX
May
MAY
Medium Frequency
Medium Pulse
MF
MP
Menu
MENU
Minimum
Missing
Mute
Navigation
Night
Normal
MIN
MISSING
MUTE
NAV
NT
NORM
Position
Positional Dilution Of
Precision
Power
Predicted
Predicted Area of Danger
Predicted Point of
Collision
Pulse Length
Pulse Modulation
Pulse Repetition
Frequency
Pulse Repetition Rate
Pulses Per Revolution
Racon
Radar
Radar Plotting
Radius
9-19
Term
Abbreviation
N
N UP
NLT
NMT
NUC
NOV
OCT
OFF
OOW
OFFSET
ON
OUT
OS
PANEL
PI
PAST
POSN
PASSV
MON
PERM
POB
PIN
PILOT
ECDIS
PDOP
PWR
PRED
PAD
PPC
PL
PM
PRF
PRR
PPR
RACON
RADAR
RP
RAD
Reference
Term
Rain
Range
Range Rings
Raster Chart Display System
Raster Navigational Chart
Rate Of Turn
Real-time Kinemetic
Receive
Receiver
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Reference
Relative
Relative Motion
Revolutions per Minute
Rhumb Line
Roll On/Roll Off Vessel
Root Mean Square
Route
Safety Contour
Sailing Vessel
Satellite
S-Band
Scan to Scan
Search And Rescue
Search And Rescue Transponder
Abbreviation
RAIN
RNG
RR
RCDS
RNC
ROT
RTK
Rx RX
RCDR
Term
Speed Over the Ground
Speed Through the Water
Stabilized
Standby
Starboard/Starboard Side
Station
Symbol(s)
Synchronized/Synchronous
Target
Abbreviation
SOG
STW
STAB
STBY
STBD
STN
SYM
SYNC
TGT
RAIM
Target Tracking
TT
REF
REL
RM
RPM
RL
RoRo
RMS
ROUTE
SF CNT
SAIL
SAT
S-BAND
SC/SC
SAR
SART
Test
Time
Time Difference
Time Dilution Of Precision
Time Of Arrival
Time Of Departure
Time to CPA
Time To Go
Time to Wheel Over Line
Track
Track Control System
Tracking
Trail(s)
Transmit and Receive
Transceiver
Transferred Line Of
Position
Transmit
Transmitter
Transmitting Heading
Device
TEST
TIME
TD
TDOP
TOA
TOD
TCPA
TTG
TWOL
TRK
TCS
TRKG
TRAIL
TXRX
TCVR
Search And Rescue Vessel
SARV
Select
September
SEL
SEP
Sequence
SEQ
TPL
TX
TMTR
THD
Set (i.e., set and drift, or setting a

value)
Ships Time
Short Pulse
Signal to Noise Ratio
Simulation
Slave
South
SET
Transponder
TPR
TIME
SP
SNR
SIM
SLAVE
S
TRAIL
TRIG
T
TM
TUNE
UHF
Speed
SPD
Speed and Distance Measuring

Equipment
SDME
Trial
Trigger Pulse
True
True Motion
Tune
Ultrahigh Frequency
Uninterruptible Power
Supply
Universal Time,
Coordinated
Reference
9-20
UPS
UTC
Term
Universal Transverse Mercator
Abbreviation
UTM
VRM
VAR
VECT
VHF
VLF
GRND
ANCH
VCD
DIVE
Unit
Cable Length
Cycles Per
Second
Degree(s)
Fathom(s)
Feet/Foot
Gigahertz
Hectopascal
Hertz
Hour(s)
Kilohertz
Kilometre
Unstabilised
UNSTAB
Variable Range Marker

Variation
Vector
Very High Frequency
Very Low Frequency
Vessel Aground
Vessel at Anchor
Vessel Constrained by Draught
Vessel Engaged in Diving Operations
Vessel Engaged in Dredging or Underwater
Operations
Vessel Engaged in Towing Operations
Vessel Not Under Command
Vessel Restricted in Manoeuvrability
Vessel Traffic Service
Vessel Underway Using Engine
Video
Visual Display Unit
Voyage
Voyage Data Recorder
Warning
Water
Waypoint
Waypoint Closure Velocity
West
Wheel Over Line
Wheel Over Point
Wheel Over Time
World Geodetic System
X-Band
deg
fm
ft
GHz
hPa
Hz
hr(s)
kHz
km
DRG
Kilopascal
kPa
TOW
NUC
RIM
VTS
UWE
VID
VDU
VOY
VDR
WARNING
WAT
WPT
WCV
W
WOL
WOP
WOT
WGS
X-BAND
Knot(s)
Megahertz
Minute(s)
Nautical Mile(s)
Second(s)
kn
MHz
min
NM
sec
9-21
Abbreviation
cbl
cps
ECDIS
Reference
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS

can Import/Export
9.5.1
File Types
Route files
User chart files
Logbook files
9.5.2
File Names
File type
Import source file name
Route files
Default export target file name
.csv, .
rtn_ (binary file name) .csv
TCS
.csv, .
rta_ (binary file name) .csv
2G TCS
.csv, .
User chart files
.csv, .
Logbooks
lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv
Normal
Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv
Specified period
Selected log
lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv
Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv
9.5.3
CSV File Data Structure
When importing files, character strings that come after // and until the end of the line are
handled as comments.
Commas (,) are used as delimiters.
Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E
Reference
9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files

(1) Normal Routes
Line
1*3
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import*1
Export*2
// (Space)
Fixed character string
ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC
// (Space)
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate
Variable length character
comment column/cells. You can
string
ECDIS.
2
edit freely.
3
// (Space)
Route name
Route name of source file
Fixed character
<Normal>
Fixed character
Route comments
Comments from the
source file
4
// (Space)
WP No.
Fixed character
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Prt [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Stb [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Arr Rad [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Speed [nm]
Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC)
Fixed character
*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)

*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)
9-23
Reference
ECDIS
(1) Normal Routes - continued

Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Export
Time Zone
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
WP number
000
Fixed character
Latitude degree value
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
Longitude degree value
139
Fixed character
Longitude minute value
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W)
Fixed character
Port side route width
0.50
Fixed character
Starboard side route width
0.50
Fixed character
Arrival circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Planned speed
12.30
Fixed character
Navigation method (RL/GC)
RL
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
Time zone code (E/W)
Fixed character
Name
Yokohama
Repeat from line five for each

waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .
Reference
9-24
(2) TCS Routes

Line
1
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Export
// (Space)
ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC
// (Space)
string
ECDIS.
2
edit freely.
3
// (Space)
Route name
Route name of source file
Fixed character
<ANTS>
Fixed character
Route comments
Comments from the
source file
4
// (Space)
WP No.
Fixed character
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Prt [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Stb [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Speed [nm]
Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC)
Fixed character
ROT [deg/min]
Fixed character
Turn Rad [nm]
Fixed character
9-25
Reference
ECDIS
(2) TCS Routes - continued

Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Export
Time Zone
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
WP number
000
Fixed character
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
Planned speed
12.30
Fixed character
RL
Fixed character
Turning rate
10.00
Fixed character
Turn circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
Yokohama
Repeat from line five for each

waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .
Reference
9-26
(3) 2G TCS Routes

Line
1
2
Contents
;
Examples, etc.
Import
Fixed character
(Space) x 63 characters
WP number
000
Fixed character
3535.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
13948.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
Arrival circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Planned speed
12.30
Fixed character
RL
Fixed character
Turning rate
010.0
Fixed character
Turning circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
Yokohama
Repeat from line second for each
ECDIS
waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.
9-27
Reference
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files

(1) Header Records
Line
1
Contents
Examples, etc.
// (Space)
USER CHART SHEET exported
by JRC ECDIS.
2
// (Space)
string
edit freely.
3
// (Space)
User chart name
File name of the source file
Fixed character
Fixed character
User chart comments
Comments from the

source file
Reference
9-28
Import
(2) Object Records

a) Symbols
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
SYMBOL
Fixed character
InstName
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
SYMBOL
Fixed character
Instruction name - 1
Instruction name
Fixed character
Instruction name
Fixed character
Instruction name
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
+1
+2
+3
ECDIS
Unused instruction name fields are filled with .
9-29
Reference
b) (Poly) Lines
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
LINE
Fixed character
InstName
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex.
LINE
Fixed character
Instruction name
Instruction name
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
Latitude degree value of the apex
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S)
Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the
139
Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex (E/W)
+1
+2
+3
apex
apex
+n
Repeat for the number of apexes
plus five lines

END
(position end)
For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with .
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.
Reference
9-30
c) Arc
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
ARC
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius [nm]
Fixed character
Start Angle [deg]
Fixed character
End Angle [deg]
+3
ARC
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
Latitude degree value of the
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference
Fixed character
Radius
2.0
Fixed character
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
ECDIS
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
9-31
Reference
c) Arc -continued
Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Starting angle
120.0
Fixed character
Ending angle
180.0
d) User Danger Lines

Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
DANGER_LINE
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
+3
DANGER_LINE
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
Latitude degree value of the apex
35
+1
+2
Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex (E/W)
apex
apex
+n
Repeat for the number of apexes
plus two lines

END
(position end)
Reference
9-32
e) Polygons
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
POLYGON
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
+3
POLYGON
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
+1
+2
apex
apex
apex
apex
ECDIS
Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex
(E/W)
+n
Repeat for the number of
apexes plus two lines

END
(position end)
9-33
Reference
f) Circles
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
CIRCLE
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius [nm]
+3
CIRCLE
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius
2.0
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Reference
9-34
g) Ellipses
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
ELLIPSE
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Horizontal Radius [nm]
Fixed character
Vertical Radius [nm]
+3
ELLIPSE
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
ECDIS
position (N/S)
,
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Horizontal radius
2.00
Fixed character
Vertical radius
1.50
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
9-35
Reference
h) Fans
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
FAN
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius [nm]
Fixed character
Start Angle [deg]
Fixed character
End Angle [deg]
+3
FAN
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius
2.0
Fixed character
Starting angle
120.0
Fixed character
Ending angle
180.0
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Reference
9-36
i) User Danger Areas

Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
DANGER_AREA
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
+3
DANGER_AREA
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
+1
+2
apex
apex
apex
apex
ECDIS
Fixed character
(E/W)
+n
Repeat for the number of
apexes plus two lines

END
(position end)
9-37
Reference
j) Text
Line
m
+1
+2
+3
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
TEXT
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Rotation
TEXT
Fixed character
Text
Fast current. Caution.
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
apex
apex
,
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Rotation angle
123
Fixed character
Font size
14
apex
apex
(E/W)
Reference
9-38
9.5.3.3 Logbook File

Line
1
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
LOGBOOK SHEET exported by
// (Space)
<<NOTE>>This strings //
indicate comment column/cells.
string
JRC ECDIS.
2
You can edit freely.

3
No
Fixed character
Date
Fixed character
Time
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Event
Fixed character
POS1
Fixed character
POS2
Fixed character
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
COG ()
Fixed character
SOG (kt)
Fixed character
Heading ()
Fixed character
Log (kt)
Fixed character
Av.Speed 4h (kt)
Fixed character
Av.Speed 24h (kt)
Fixed character
9-39
ECDIS
Reference
Logbook File (continued)

Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Voyage Dist. (G)(nm)
Fixed character
Voyage Dist. (W)(nm)
Fixed character
Charts
Fixed character
Set ()
Fixed character
Drift (kt),
Fixed character
Wind Dir. (),
Fixed character
Wind Speed (m/sec)
Fixed character
Wave Height (m)
Fixed character
Air Press (hPa)
Fixed character
Temp. (C)
Fixed character
Water Temp. (C)
Fixed character
Engine Rev. (r/min)
Fixed character
Comment
Number
0001
,
Date (LMT)
2002/04/09
Time (LMT)
08:45:24
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
,
Event type
Specified time
,
POS1 name
POS2 name
GPS1
GPS2
Reference
Import
9-40

Line
Contents
Latitude degree value for POS1
Examples, etc.
35
,
Latitude minute value for POS1
35.123
,
Latitude code for POS1 (N/S)
Longitude degree value for

POS1
,
139
Longitude minute value for

POS1
,
48.234
Longitude code for POS1 (E/W)
123.4
12.3
,
Bow heading
123.5
,
Ship speed relative to water
12.4
Average ship speed for last four

hours
,
12.0
Average ship speed for last 24

hours
,
13.2
Total distance relative to land
12345.5
,
Total distance relative to water
12300.6
JP34OBJ
Set
123.4
12.4
234.5
10.3
,
Wave height
Wind speed
Chart name that caused the

event
,
Wind direction
ECDIS
Drift
Ship speed relative to land
Course relative to land
Import
2.0
9-41
Reference

Line
Contents
Atmospheric pressure
Examples, etc.
1003
,
Air temperature
23.4
,
Water temperature
20.3
,
Engine revolutions
135.6
,
Comments
n
Comments
Repeat four lines for the number
Reference
of events.
Import
9-42
9.6 Display Symbols

Display Symbols on Manual Update
(1) Symbol Tab

Category
Method
Graphic
Circle
Triangle
Square
General
Diamond
Multiple Mark
Warning
Manual Updates
Delete Symbol
Anchor Point
Anchor Area
Anchor
Anchor Berth
Anchor Prohibited Area
Light flare, default
ECDIS
Light flare, red
Buoys
Barrel buoy
Light flare, green
Light flare, white/yellow
without light
9-43
Reference
(1) Symbol Tab - continued

Category
Method
Light flare, red
Can buoy
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Conical buoy
Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Light flare, red
Installation buoy
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Mooring buoy, barrel shape
Light flare, green
without light
Reference
9-44
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Light flare, red
Mooring buoy, can shape
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Cone point up
Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Light flare, red
Pillar buoy
Cone point
down
Light flare, green
ECDIS
without light
Light flare, red

2cones point
upward
Light flare, green
without light
9-45
Reference

Category
Method
Light flare, red

2cones point
downward
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red

2cones base
to base
Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Pillar buoy
Light flare, red

2cones point
to point
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Sphere
Light flare, green
without light
Reference
9-46
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Light flare, red
2 sphere
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Cylinder
Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Pillar buoy
Light flare, red
Board
Light flare, green
ECDIS
without light
Light flare, red
Cube point up
Light flare, green
without light
9-47
Reference

Category
Method
Light flare, red

Flag or other
shape
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Pillar buoy
T-shape
Light flare, green
without light
Buoys
Light flare, red
X-shape
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Spherical buoy
Light flare, green
without light
Reference
9-48
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Light flare, red
Spar buoy
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
Buoys
Super-buoy
Light flare, green
without light
Light flare, red
LANBY, super-buoy
Light flare, green

ECDIS
without light
Light flare, red
Lights float
Light float
Light flare, green
without light
9-49
Reference

Category
Method
Light flare, red
Lights float
Light vessel
Light flare, green
without light
Beacon in general
Cone point up
Cone point down
2cones point upward
2cones point downward
2cones base to base
2cones point to point
Sphere
Beacons
Beacon in general
2 sphere
Cylinder
Board
Cube point up
X-shape
Upright cross
Beacon point down
Beacon point up
T-shape
Reference
9-50
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Lattice beacon
Lattice beacon
Cone point up
Cone point down
2cones point upward
2cones base to base

Lattice beacon
Sphere
2 sphere
Beacon tower
Cone point up
Beacons
Cone point down
2cones point upward
ECDIS
2cones base to base
Beacon tower
Sphere
Cylinder
Board
Cube point up
X-shape
Upright cross
9-51
Reference

Category
Method
Beacon point down
Beacon point up
T-shape
2 sphere
Cylinder
Board
Beacons
Beacon tower
Cube point up
X-shape
Upright cross
Beacon point down
Beacon point up
T-shape
Berth number
Ferry area
Cable ferry area
Fortified structure
Conspicuous fortified structure
Fish trap, fish weir, tunny net

Fish stakes
Ports and Harbors
Fishing harbor
Fish farm
RoRo terminal
Mooring dolphin
Deviation mooring dolphin
Pile or bollard
Yacht harbor, marina
Reference
9-52
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Airport
Opening bridge
Buildings
Built-up area
Non-conspicuous religious building, Christian
Conspicuous religious building, Christian

Non-conspicuous religious building, on-Christian
Conspicuous religious building, non-Christian
Minaret
Conspicuous minaret
Single building
Conspicuous single building
Cairn
Conspicuous cairn
Buildings
Chimney
ECDIS
Conspicuous chimney
Cranes
Dome
Conspicuous dome
Dish aerial
Conspicuous dish aerial
Flagstaff ,flagpole
Flare stack
9-53
Reference

Category
Method
Conspicuous flare stack
Hulk
Monument
Conspicuous monument
Mast
Conspicuous mast
Mine, quarry
Quarry
Refinery
Conspicuous refinery
Silo
Buildings
Conspicuous silo
Timber yard
Tank
Conspicuous tank
Tank farm
Conspicuous tank farm
Tower
Conspicuous tower
Water tower
Conspicuous water tower
Radio, television tower
Conspicuous radio, television tower
Reference
9-54
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Wind-motor
Conspicuous wind-motor
Wind generator farm

Buildings
Conspicuous wind generator farm
Windmill
Conspicuous windmill
Navigable lock gate
Artificial Feature
Non-navigable lock gate
Offshore platform
Coastguard station
Rescue station
Miscellaneous Station
Pilot station
Signal station
Mariner's information note

Caution
ECDIS
Mariner's caution note
Underwater hazard with a defined depth
Dangerous
Underwater hazard with depth greater than 20

meters
Hazard on the surface
Isolated danger of depth less than the safety
contour
Obstructions, depth not stated
Obstructions
Obstructions in the intertidal area
Obstructions
Obstructions in the water which is always above
water level
9-55
Reference

Category
Method
Dangerous underwater rock of uncertain depth
Rock which covers and uncovers or is awash at low
water
Obstructions
Wreck showing any portion of hull or superstructure

at level of chart datum
Non-dangerous wreck, depth unknown
Dangerous wreck, depth unknown
Direction of buoyage
Direction and color of buoyage for approaching
harbor in IALA region A(red to port)
Direction and color of buoyage for approaching
harbor in IALA region B(green to port)
Fairway with one-way traffic in direction indicated
Fairway with two-way traffic
Inshore traffic
Recommended traffic direction between parts of a
traffic separation scheme, or for ships not needing a
deep water route
Recommended two-way track as an area, based on
Routes
fixed marks
Recommended one-way track as an area, based on
fixed marks
Traffic roundabout
Reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way route of a
traffic separation scheme
Single traffic directions in a two-way route of a traffic
separation scheme
Traffic crossing area
Part of deep water route

Reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way part of a
deep-water route
Traffic direction in a one way lane of a traffic
separation scheme
Restricted Area
Reference
Prohibited or restricted area
9-56
Graphic

Category
Method
Graphic
Fishing ground
Fishing Ground
Fish haven
Fishing or trawling is prohibited or restricted
Radio calling-in point for traffic in one direction only
Radio calling-in point for traffic in both directions
Radio station
Rader transponder beacon
Radio/Rader
Rader conspicuous
Rader reflector
Rader scanner
Conspicuous radar scanner
Rader reflector
Fog signal
Fog signal
Magnetic anomaly at a point
ECDIS
Magnetic anomaly along a line or over an area

Local Magnetic anomaly
Magnetic variation at a point
Magnetic variation along a line or over an area

Hill or mountain top
Conspicuous hill or mountain top
Cable area
Natural Feature/Seabed
Foul area of seabed safe for navigation but not for

anchoring
Sand waves
Spring
Weed, kelp
Unknown
? Mark
9-57
Reference
(2) Line Tab

Category
Method
Symbol
Simple Line
General
Arc
warning Line
Manual Updates
Deletion by a manual updates

Boundary of an anchorage area
Anchor
Boundary of area where anchoring is prohibited or

restricted
Ferry route
Ferry Routes
Cable ferry route
Ports and Harbors
Fishing stakes
Caution
Boundary of area with a specific caution

Boundary of area to be navigated with caution
Two-way deep water route centerline, based on fixed
marks
One-way deep water route centerline, based on fixed
marks
Boundary of deep water route
Regulated two-way recommended route centerline,
Routes
based on fixed marks

Regulated one-way recommended route centerline,
based on fixed marks
Non-Regulated two-way recommended track, based
on fixed marks
Non-Regulated one-way recommended track, based
on fixed marks
Boundary of an area where enter is prohibited or
Restricted Area
restricted
Boundary of a restricted area
Administrated Area
Fishing Ground
Jurisdiction boundary
Boundary of an area where trawling or fishing is
prohibited or restricted
Boundary of a submarine cable area
Submarine cable
Cable/Pipe
Oil, gas pipeline, submerged or on land
Water pipeline, sewer, etc.
Reference
9-58
(2) Line Tab (continued)

Category
Method
Symbol
Boundary between IALA-A and IALA-B systems of

lateral buoys and beacons
Boundary of a navigation feature such as a fairway,
magnetic anomaly, etc.
Miscellaneous
Boundary
Boundary of a submarine pipeline with potentially

dangerous contents
Boundary of a submarine pipeline with potentially
non-dangerous contents
Change of depth unit line, bounds 'fathom depths'
Change of depth unit line, bounds 'meter depths'
Unknown
? Mark
(3) Area Tab

Category
Method
Symbol
Polygon
Circle
(Area)
ECDIS
Ellipse
Fan
Warning Area
(4) Text Tab

Category
Method
Symbol
Small font
(Text)
Large font
9-59
Reference
9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS

The following description is list of set when starting Navigation & Planning.
(1) Display Panel
No.
1
Category
Own Ship Information
Contents
Set when starting
HDG
Value input from sensor
STW
COG
SOG
Time
Position
CTS
Vector
Depth
10
RADAR (Display ON/OFF)
OFF
11
TT1 (Display ON/OFF)
OFF
12
TT2 (Display ON/OFF)
OFF
13
AIS (Display ON/OFF)
OFF
14
Association (ON/OFF)
The value when ending last time
Ring (ON/OFF)
Sector (ON/OFF)
Auto Sail Mode
NotRDY
18
Course change Mode
(blank)
19
Sailing Status
(blank)
15
Other Ship Information Setting
AIS Filter
16
17
Auto Sail Status
20
Steer mode
(blank)
Route
UNLOAD
22
To WPT
(blank)
23
DIST
****.*
24
BRG
***.*
DEST (WPT)
26
DEST (Distance)
****.*
27
SPD (Actual/CALC)
Actual
28
SPD (Speed)
**.*
29
TTG
*****:**:**
30
ETA
**_** **:**
21
25
Route Watch
Route Information - CALC
Reference
9-60
Set value list when starting ECDIS - Display Panel (continued)

No.
31
Category
Route Information - CALC
Contents
Set
Set when starting

Calculated by the difference between the
COG and HDG vectors
32
Drift
Calculated by the difference between the

COG and HDG vectors
33
Final ETA
**_** **:**
Total DIST
***.*
To/Next
To
36
WPT No.
*******
37
Comment
(blank)
38
LAT
** **.***'*
39
LON
*** **.***'*
Route Information - Route
34
35
Route Information - WPT
40
Chart information
Chart Type
41
Chart information
Display Category
42
(S-57/C-MAP2/C-MAP3)
Scale/Range
43
Scale
44
Range
45
Motion Mode
46
Azimuth Mode
47
Rotation degree
Select Chart
Motion Mode
EBL1 (Display ON/OFF)
51
EBL1 (Active/Inactive
52
EBL1 (Azimuth T/R)
53
EBL1 (Base Point Mode)
54
VRM1 (Display ON/OFF)
55
VRM1 (Active/Inactive
56
VRM1 (Units of Distance)
57
EBL2 (Display ON/OFF)
58
EBL2 (Active/Inactive
59
EBL2 (Azimuth T/R)
60
EBL2 (Base Point Mode)
61
VRM2 (Display ON/OFF)
62
VRM2 (Active/Inactive
63
VRM2 (Units of Distance)
48
Chart information (ARCS)
49
50
64
Tools (EBL/VRM)
PANEL
65
VID
66
TGT
67
Day-Night level
Azimuth T/R
T (True North mode)
Unit of Distance
NM
68
Brilliance
Cursor position
69
70
TCS Bar
Unit of Distance
71
Running Fix (Context Menu)
(Display Running Fix)
Removed
9-61
ECDIS
Reference
(2) Menu setting

No.
1
Category
Contents
Set when starting
TT1
(ON/OFF)
OFF
TT2
(ON/OFF)
OFF
AIS
(ON/OFF)
OFF
All
(ON/OFF)
OFF
Deactive All AIS
All List
Not Display
AIS/TT
Select List
Not Display
Target Track
Target Track Function
Target Track Setting
Target Memory Interval
10
Clear Track Color
11
Clear Track Number
Color - All
Color - Target Track No.1
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Color - Other
24
Display - All
25
Display - Target Track No.1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Display - Other
12
Target Track
Target Track Setting
13
"Target Track Color &
14
Display"
36
Target Track - File Operation
Target Track Display
37
Own Ship's AIS Data
All Contents
38
Message
Addressed Message
39
Message
Broadcast Message
Reference
9-62
Set value list when starting ECDIS - Setting Menu (continued)

No.
40
Category
AIS/TT
Contents
Set when starting
AIS Sentence - VDM1
41
AIS Sentence - TTD1
42
AIS Sentence - TTD2
43
AIS/TT Setting
Display TT Vector
44
AIS/TT Past Position
45
Target Number - AIS
46
Target Number - TT
47
AIS Filter - Ring (ON/OFF)
48
AIS Filter - Ring (Range)
49
AIS Filter - Sector (ON/OFF)
50
AIS Filter - Sector (Angle)
51
Filter Mode
52
Filter Display
53
CPA
54
TCPA
55
AIS Lost Alarm
56
AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm
Association
Association Setting
57
58
Synchronized with TTD
59
Priority
60
Bearing
61
Range
62
Course
63
Speed
Start (Normal
To Waypoint
Start (TCS)
To Waypoint
66
Pre Run Speed
Value of STW
67
Pre Run Time
68
Enter Angle
69
Turn Rate
70
Pre Run Distance
71
XTD MAX
64
65
Auto Sail
ECDIS
72
Setting (Type 1)
Turning Gain
73
Setting (Type 2)
XTD MAX
74
Drift Correction
75
Dead Band ON/OFF
76
Dead Band
77
Auto Stop
78
Setting (Type 3)
Track Gain
79
Drift Correction
80
Dead Band ON/OFF
81
Dead Band
9-63
Reference

No.
82
Category
Route
Route Planning
Contents
Set when starting
Table Editor
83
Route Planning
Graphic Editor
84
Create Alternate Route
Cannot be selected
85
Distance Measurement
Cannot be selected
86
From
Way Point
87
From - WPT No.
00
88
To
Way Point
89
To - WPT No.
00
90
Use XTD Alarm
(ON/OFF)
91
Setting
Date/Time for monitoring
Select Route
92
ETA (ON/OFF)
93
Default - Width Prt
94
Default - Width Stb
95
Default - Arr Radius
96
Default - Speed
97
Default - Sail
98
Default - Turn Rate
99
Default - Turn Radius
100
Default - Time Zone
101
Max. Latitude
102
Tau Multiplier for Limit Check
103
Check Safety
in Editing (ON/OFF)
104
Route Type
105
Side Sign Color
106
Display Side Sign (ON/OFF)
107
Ownship/
Adjust - Cursor
108
Track
Adjust - Enter Position
LAT
Current Position of Own ship
LON
LAT
LON
Radius
109
110
Adjust - Enter Offset
111
Anchor Watch
112
Create Monitoring Circle
Reference
9-64

No.
Category
113
Ownship/
114
Track
Setting
115
Contents
Set when starting
Ship's Name
Own Ship Symbol
Display Heading Line
(ON/OFF)
116
Display Beam Line (ON/OFF)
117
Vector
118
Vector
Display Over the Ground

Display Through the water

119
Vector - Vector Time
120
Vector - Display Vector Time
Mark (ON/OFF)
121
Vector - Display Vector Time
Mark (Interval Time)

122
Track - Display Past Track
(ON/OFF)
123
Track - Color
124
Track - Track Period
125
Track - Past POSN
126
Track - Display Time Label
(ON/OFF)
127
Track - Interval
128
Danger Detection - Display
Vector Area (ON/OFF)

129
Danger Detection - Display
Sector Area (ON/OFF)

Danger Detection
130
Set Alarm Limit

131
User Map
See "Main - Setting
- Alarm
ECDIS
Setting"
Selecting User Map
Unselected
132
Select User Map
133
Unselect User Map
134
User Map Editor
Marking/Highlighting
LAT
LON
137
MIN Scale
1:100,000,000
138
MAX Scale
1:1000
139
ID
Automatically set
140
Time
Current Time (UTC)
141
Comment
(blank)
LAT
LON
144
MIN Scale
1:100,000,000
145
MAX Scale
1:1000
146
Comment
(blank)
135
136
142
143
Chart
Event Mark
Information Mark
9-65
Reference

No.
147
Category
Contents
Set when starting
LAT
LON
149
MIN Scale
1:100,000,000
150
MAX Scale
1:1000
151
Set/Drift/Time
Actual
Chart
Tidal Stream Mark
148
(Actual/Redirected)
152
Set/Drift/Time (Direction)
000
153
Set/Drift/Time (Speed)
0.0
154
Set/Drift/Time (Time)
Current Time (UTC)
155
Comment
(blank)
156
LAT/LON
(blank)
157
Highlight
MIN Scale
1:100,000,000
MAX Scale
1:1000
LAT
Current Position of
158
159
Delete Event mark
Off Center - Enter Position
160
chart displaying center

LON
161
Current Position of
chart displaying center
162
Off Center - Home
163
User Setting
Name
(blank)
Save My Port List

164
User Setting - My Port List
165
User Setting
Name
(blank)
Save Chart Setting

166
User Setting
Chart Setting List
167
Select S-57 Chart
168
Fix View
(ON/OFF)
OFF
169
Accept S-57 Updates
170
Graphical Index
Display ENC Data (ON/OFF)
Display Chart Name
171
(ON/OFF)
172
Chart Boundary - Overview
(ON/OFF)
173
Chart Boundary - General
174
Chart Boundary - Coastal
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
175
Chart Boundary - Approach
(ON/OFF)
176
Chart Boundary - Harbor
177
Chart Boundary - Berthing
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
Reference
9-66

No.
178
179
Category
Chart
Contents
Set when starting
Manual Update
Multi View
Single View
Single View
Top Bottom
Right Top View
Left Top View
Right Bottom View
Left Bottom View
180
Select Area
181
Wide Range View (ON/OFF)
OFF
182
Chart Portfolio - Create
183
Chart Portfolio - Top Window
184
Chart Abbreviation
185
ARCS
(Setting Offset)
187
LAT
188
LON
Temporary and Preliminary

186
ARCS - Adjust Datum Offset
189
ARCS
Geodetic Datum - From
(blank)
190
Datum Transformation
Reference Position - LAT
0 00.000N
Reference Position - LON
0 00.000E
Display Category
Area Boundary
Depth Alarm
191
192
193
194
Setting - S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
(View Common)
Shallow Contour
195
Depth Alarm - Safety Contour
196
Depth Alarm - Safety Depth
197
Depth Alarm - Deep Contour
198
Depth Alarm
Two color Depth (ON/OFF)

199
Depth Alarm
Shallow Pattern (ON/OFF)

200
Depth Alarm - Show Isolated
Danger In Shallow Water

(ON/OFF)
201
Redraw - Border Range
202
Redraw - Margin
203
Chart Symbol
204
Chart Symbol - Full Light
Line(ON/OFF)
205
Chart Symbol Consider
Scale Minimum (ON/OFF)

206
C-MAP Ed.3 Database
(Display and ON/OFF setting)
9-67
Reference
ECDIS

No.
207
Category
Chart
(View 1)
208
209
(View 1) (Layer)
210
Contents
Set when starting
Type
Text Size
[S]unknown object
(S-57 or C-MAP Ed.2)

[S]Land region,
Sea area/named water area

211
[S]Causeway, Dam, Dyke,
Gate
212
[S]Dyke, Slope topline,
Airport, Bulding, single,

Crane, Landmark,
Built-up area
213
[S]Swept area
214
[S]Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable,
Submarine
215
[S]Navigation line
216
[S]Recommended track
217
[S]Ferry route
218
[S]Radar range, Radar line
219
[S]Restricted area
220
[S]Ferry route, Military

practice
area,
Offshore
production area
221
[S]Caution area, Fairway
222
[S]Fishing ground, Marine
farm/culture
223
[S]Anchorage area, Anchor
berth
224
[S]Cable area, Pipeline area
225
[S]Dumping ground, Cargo
transshipment area,
Incineration area
226
[S]Daymark
227
[S]Navigational system mark
228
[S]topmarks

229
[S]light

230
[S]Fog signal, Retro-reflector,
Radar transponder beacon,

Radar reflector
231
[S]Pilot boarding place, Signal

station, Trafic, Signal
station, Warning
Reference
9-68

No.
232
233
Category
Chart
Contents
Set when starting
[O]Quality of data
(View 1) (Layer)
[O]Nautical publication
information
234
[O]Coverage, Compilation
scale of data
235
[O]Local magnetic anomary,
Magnetic variation
236
[O]Sloping ground, Land
elevation, Slope topline

237
[O]Vegetation, Lake, Rapids,
River, Water fall, Tideway

238
[O]Building, Fortified
structure, Land mark,

Silo/Tank, Airport, Road,
Railway
239
[O]Check point, Harbour
facility
240
[O]Distance mark
241
[O]Berch,
Crane,

Drydock,
Mooring/Warping facility, Gate

242
[O]Sounding
243
[O]Depth area, Depth counter
244
[O]Water turbulance, Tide...,
Current-non-gravitational
245
[O]Seabed area, Weed/Kelp,
Spring
246
[O]Fishing-facility
247
[O]Obstruction, Wreck,
Underwater/Awash rock
248
[O]Cable, Submarine,
Pipeline, Submarine/on land

249
[O]Continental shelf area
250
[O]Custom zone, Free port
area, Harbour area

251
[O]Fishery zone
252
[O]Administration area,
Contiguous zone, Exclusive

economic zone
253
[O]Radar station, Radio
station, Coastguard station,

Rescure station
254
[-]Updated Objects
(S-57 Only)
9-69
Reference
ECDIS

No.
255
Category
Chart
Contents
Important text
(View 1)
(Vertical Clearance bridge,
(Text)
256
Set when starting

overhead cable, so on)

Other text
(Name of building so on)

(C-MAP Ed.3 only)
257
Name/Number of: buoys,
beacons, so on
258
259
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical
publication
260
Nature of seabed

261
Geographic names
262
Value of: magnetic variation,
swept depth
263

264
Berth number

265
266
(View 2)
267
268
(View 2)
(Layer)
269
National language
Type
Text Size
[S]unknown object

[S]Land reagion, Sea
area/named water area

270
[S]Causeway, Dam, Dyke,
Gate
271
[S]Dyke, Slope topline,
Airport, Bulding, single,

Crane, Landmark,
Built-up area
272
[S]Swept area
273
[S]Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable,
Submarine
274
[S]Navigation line
275
[S]Recommended track
276
[S]Ferry route
277
[S]Radar range, Radar line
278
[S]Restricted area
Reference
9-70

No.
279
Category
Chart
Contents
[S]Ferry route, Military
(View 2)
practice area, Offshore
(Layer)
production area
Set when starting

280
[S]Caution area, Fairway
281
[S]Fishing ground, Marine
282
[S]Anchorage area, Anchor
farm/culture
berth
283
[S]Cable area, Pipeline area
284
[S]Dumping ground, Cargo
transshipment area,
Incineration area
285
[S]Daymark
286
[S]Navigational system mark
287
[S]topmarks

288
[S]light

289
[S]Fog signal, Retro-reflector,
Radar transponder beacon,

Radar reflector
290
[S]Pilot boarding place, Signal
station, Trafic, Signal

station, Warning
291
[O]Quality of data
292
[O]Nautical publication
information
293
[O]Coverage, Compilation
scale of data
294
[O]Local magnetic anomary,
295
[O]Sloping ground, Land
Magnetic variation
elevation, Slope topline

296
[O]Vegetation, Lake, Rapids,
River, Water fall, Tideway

297
[O]Building, Fortified
structure, Land mark,

Silo/Tank, Airport, Road,
Railway
298
[O]Check point, Harbor
facility
299
[O]Distance mark
300
[O]Berch, Crane, Drydock,
Mooring/Warping facility,
Gate
301
[O]Sounding
9-71
Reference
ECDIS

No.
302
Category
Chart
303
Contents
Set when starting
[O]Depth area, Depth counter
(View 2)
[O]Water turbulance, Tide...,
(Layer)
Current-non-gravitational
304
[O]Seabed area, Weed/Kelp,
Spring
305
[O]Fishing-facility
306
[O]Obstruction, Wreck,
Underwater/Awash rock
307
[O]Cable, Submarine,
Pipeline, Submarine/on land

308
[O]Continental shelf area
309
[O]Custom zone, Free port
310
[O]Fishery zone
311
[O]Administration area,
area, Harbour area
Contiguous zone, Exclusive

economic zone
312
[O]Radar station, Radio
station, Coastguard station,

Rescure station
[-]Updated Objects
313
(S-57 Only)
314
Important text
(View 2)
(Vertical Clearance bridge,
(Text)
315
overhead cable, so on)

Other text
(Name of building so on)

(C-MAP Ed.3 only)
316
Name/Number of: buoys,
beacons, so on
317
Light description
318
Note on chart data or nautical
publication
319
Nature of seabed

320
Geographic names
321
Value of: magnetic variation,
swept depth
322

323
Berth number

National language
324
Reference
9-72

No.
325
Category
Chart
Setting - Other Chart
Contents
Mariner's Mark/Line -
Set when starting

Clearing Line (ON/OFF)

326
Mariner's Mark/Line
Tidal Stream (ON/OFF)

327
Mariner's Mark/Line
328
Mariner's Mark/Line
Highlighting (ON/OFF)
Event Mark (ON/OFF)

329
Mariner's Mark/Line
Reference Point (ON/OFF)

330
Mariner's Mark/Line
331
Mariner's Mark/Line
Information (ON/OFF)
Navtex Mark (ON/OFF)

332
User Chart
Symbol (ON/OFF)
333
User Chart - Line
Simple Line, Warning Line

(ON/OFF)
334
User Chart Line Arc
(ON/OFF)
335
User Chart - Area - Polygon,
Warning Area (ON/OFF)

336
User Chart - Area
Circle (ON/OFF)
337
User Chart - Area
Ellipse (ON/OFF)
338
User Chart Area
Fan (ON/OFF)
339
340
Main
User Chart - Text (ON/OFF)
(Displaying EBL Maneuver)
Removed
341
Reach
600
342
Turn Mode
Radius
343
Turn Set - Radius
0.5
344
Turn Set - Rate
30.0
(Displaying Cross Bearing)
Removed
346
LAT
347
LON
348
Bearing
180
349
Distance
The value depended on the scale
345
EBL Maneuver
Cross Bearing
350
351
Create Clearing Line
True/Reverse
(Displaying Clearing Line)
Displaying
(Displaying Clearing Line)
Displaying
Not Less Than

352
Create Clearing Line

Not More Than
9-73
Reference
ECDIS

No.
353
Category
Main
LOP - Create LOP
Contents
Set when starting
(Displaying LOP)
Removed
354
Latitude
355
Longitude
356
Type (Select Bearing/Range)
357
Type (Angle)
0.0
358
Type (Distance)
The value depended on the scale
359
Time
Current Time (LMT)
LOP - Delete All LOP
361
Print
362
Save Screen
363
Logbook (Filter)
Logbook Setting
See "Main - Setting -
360
Logbook Setting"
364
Date (ON/OFF)
ON (Fixed Display)
365
Time (ON/OFF)
ON (Fixed Display)
366
Event (ON/OFF)
367
POSN1 (ON/OFF)
368
POSN2 (ON/OFF)
369
Latitude (ON/OFF)
370
Longitude (ON/OFF)
371
COG() (ON/OFF)
372
SOG(kn) (ON/OFF)
373
HDG() (ON/OFF)
374
STW(kn) (ON/OFF)
375
Av.Speed 4h(kn) (ON/OFF)
376
Av.Speed 24h(kn) (ON/OFF)
377
Voyage DIST(G)(NM)
378
Voyage DIST(W)(NM)
Logbook (Column Setting)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
379
Charts (ON/OFF)
380
Set() (ON/OFF)
381
Drift(kn) (ON/OFF)
382
Wind Dir() (ON/OFF)
383
Wind Speed(m/sec)
(ON/OFF)
384
Wave Dir() (ON/OFF)
385
Wave Height(m) (ON/OFF)
386
Air Press(hPa) (ON/OFF)
387
Temp( C) (ON/OFF)
388
Water Temp( C) (ON/OFF)
389
Engine Rev(rpm) (ON/OFF)
390
Comment (ON/OFF)
391
(The Order of Display)
Reference
9-74

No.
392
Category
Main
Logbook (View Navtex)
Contents
Marking on the Chart
(ON/OFF)
393
Expire Date (ON/OFF)
Set when starting

(Setting Each Navtex)
394
Expire Date (Date)
395
(Navtex Position)

396
Logbook (Delete Navtex)
Deleted Range
Selected Message
(Selected Message/Before
specified date/All Message)
397
Before specified date (Date)
Current Date (UTC)
398
Logbook (View REF Point)
399
Logbook (Export)
Export Range (Selected
Selected Message
Message/ From - To)

400
From (Date)
Current Date (UTC)
401
To (Date)
Current Date (UTC)
402
Save As - Filename
LOGBOOK.csv
403
Save As - Folder
ECDIS_DATATMP
Print Range (Selected
Selected Message
404
Logbook (Print)
Message/ From - To)

405
From (Date)
Current Date (UTC)
406
To (Date)
Current Date (UTC)
407
Logbook (Jump)
408
Logbook (Input)
Wind Dir.

(Setting Each Log)
409
Wind Speed

ECDIS
(Setting Each Log)

410
Wave Dir.

(Setting Each Log)
411
Wave Height

(Setting Each Log)
412
Air Press

(Setting Each Log)
413
Air Temp

(Setting Each Log)
414
Water Temp

(Setting Each Log)
415
Engine Rev.

(Setting Each Log)
416
Comment

(Setting Each Log)
9-75
Reference

No.
417
Category
Main
Multi Window
Contents
418
Analog Meter
419
Climate
420
Draft
421
Current Wind
422
Course Rudder Graph
423
Course Bar
424
Ship
425
Engine Graph
426
Depth Graph
427
Current
428
DIR/DIST EXP Display
429
Numeric NAV INFO
430
Wind Graph
431
TEMP Graph Setting
432
Preset Save
433
Option
434
Rader Overlay - Radar 1
Set when starting
Preset
-
(ON/OFF)
OFF
435
Rader Overlay - Radar 2
(ON/OFF)
OFF
436
Rader Overlay
(ON/OFF)
OFF
IR(Interference Rejection)
439
Gain Adjust
440
Sea Adjust
441
Semi Auto/Manual
442
Rain Adjust
443
Auto/Manual
444
Video
Acquisition Zone 1
OFF
Range Rings
437
Rader Overlay
Bearing Scale
438
Rader Overlay - Option
445
Make AZ
AZ Function (ON/OFF)
446
Acquisition Zone 1 MAKE
447
Acquisition Zone 1
OFF
AZ 1 (Make mode ON/OFF)

Start Side:
448
Acquisition Zone 1 - End Side:
449
Acquisition Zone 1
Far Edge:
450
Acquisition Zone 1 - Width:
451
Acquisition Zone 2
OFF
AZ Function (ON/OFF)
452
Acquisition Zone 2 MAKE

AZ 2 (Make mode ON/OFF)
Reference
9-76
OFF

No.
453
Category
Main
Make AZ
Contents
Acquisition Zone 2
Set when starting

Start Side:
454
Acquisition Zone 2 - End Side:
455
Acquisition Zone 2
Far Edge:
456
457
File Manager
Acquisition Zone 2 - Width:
Type
Route File
458
Device (Left Side)
Local Disk
459
Device (Right Side)
Local Disk
460
Test - Alarm Log
(Display Tab)
461
Test - System Information
Type
Fixed Value
462
Display Unit
Fixed Value
463
Maintenance No.
Fixed Value
464
TCS
Fixed Value
Operating Time - Display
The value depended on the
Operating Time - HDD1
465
Test - Operating Time
system
466
system
467
Operating Time - HDD2

system
468
Sensor
Heading - Port (Use SRB/Use
Local Port/Manual)
469
Heading - Source
470
Heading - GYRO Setting
471
Heading - Manual (Heading)
472
STW - Port (Use SRB/Use
Local Port/Manual)
473
STW - Source
474
STW - Manual (STW)
475
POSN1 - Port (Use SRB/Use
Local Port)
476
POSN1 - Source
477
POSN2 - Port (Use SRB/Use
Local Port)
478
POSN2 - Source
479
Date - Source
480
Time Zone - Source
481
Date/Time Setting
See "Main - Setting Date/Time Setting"
482
Code Input
9-77
Reference
ECDIS

No.
483
Category
Main
Setting - Color and Brilliance

Setting
484
Contents
Day/Night
Set when starting

Color - User Dialog
485
Color - Character
486
Color - Target Symbol
487
Brilliance - User Dialog
488
Brilliance - Character
489
Brilliance - Target Symbol
Option1
491
Option2
492
User
Manual - LMT Date
Current Date (LMT)
Setting - Option Key Setting
490
493
Setting - Date/Time Setting
494
Manual - LMT Time
Current Time (LMT)
495
Manual - Time Zone
496
UTC/LMT
497
Display Style
Distance Unit Simultaneity
499
EBL/VRM Step
500
Cursor Read Out
Logging - At Noon (ON/OFF)
Logging - Every ** minutes
Setting - Marker Setting
498
Setting - Logbook Setting
501
502
(ON/OFF)
503
Logging - Every ** minutes
(select time)
504
Logging - Route Alarm
(ON/OFF)
505
Logging - Chart Alarm
(ON/OFF)
506
Logging - Navtex (ON/OFF)
507
Logging - When press
(ON/OFF)
508
Logging - AUTO Sail/Sensors
(ON/OFF)
509
Logging - Others (ON/OFF)
510
View - At Noon (ON/OFF)
511
View - Specified Period
(ON/OFF)
512
View - Route Alarm (ON/OFF)
513
View - Chart Alarm (ON/OFF)
514
View - Navtex (ON/OFF)
515
View - When press
(ON/OFF)
516
View - AUTO Sail/Sensors
(ON/OFF)
517
View - Others (ON/OFF)
518
View - Latest display days
Reference
9-78

No.
519
Category
Contents
Set when starting
Station - Filtering (ON/OFF)
(Navtex Setting)
Station - A (ON/OFF)
521
Station - B (ON/OFF)
522
Station - C (ON/OFF)
523
Station - D (ON/OFF)
524
Station - E (ON/OFF)
525
Station - F (ON/OFF)
526
Station - G (ON/OFF)
527
Station - H (ON/OFF)
528
Station - I (ON/OFF)
529
Station - J (ON/OFF)
530
Station - K (ON/OFF)
531
Station - L (ON/OFF)
532
Station - M (ON/OFF)
533
Station - N (ON/OFF)
534
Station - O (ON/OFF)
535
Station - P (ON/OFF)
536
Station - Q (ON/OFF)
537
Station - R (ON/OFF)
538
Station - S (ON/OFF)
539
Station - T (ON/OFF)
540
Station - U (ON/OFF)
541
Station - V (ON/OFF)
542
Station - W (ON/OFF)
543
Station - X (ON/OFF)
544
Station - Y (ON/OFF)
545
Station - Z (ON/OFF)
546
Message - Filtering (ON/OFF)
547
Message - A (ON/OFF)
ON (Fixed Display)
548
Message - B (ON/OFF)
ON (Fixed Display)
549
Message - C (ON/OFF)
550
Message - D (ON/OFF)
ON (Fixed Display)
551
Message - E (ON/OFF)
552
Message - F (ON/OFF)
553
Message - G (ON/OFF)
554
Message - H (ON/OFF)
555
Message - I (ON/OFF)
556
Message - J (ON/OFF)
557
Message - K (ON/OFF)
558
Message - L (ON/OFF)
ON (Fixed Display)
559
Message - V (ON/OFF)
560
Message - W (ON/OFF)
561
Message - X (ON/OFF)
520
Main
9-79
Reference
ECDIS

No.
562
Category
Main
563
Set when starting
Message - Y (ON/OFF)
(Navtex Setting)
Message - Z (ON/OFF)
Month/Year
564
565
Contents
Setting - Voyage Distance

Clear
566
Setting - Display Panel
Display CTS (ON/OFF)
567
Option
Display DEPTH (ON/OFF)
Analog Meter - Display HDG
568
(ON/OFF)
569
Analog Meter - Display COG
(ON/OFF)
570
Analog Meter - Display Drift
(ON/OFF)
571
Analog Meter - Display CTS
(ON/OFF)
Analog Meter - Display
572
Indicator (ON/OFF)
573
Setting - Alarm Setting
Difference between POSN1
(Limit)
and POSN2 (ON/OFF)
574
Difference between POSN1

and POSN2 (Distance)

575
Shift of POSN1 (ON/OFF)
576
Shift of POSN1 (Distance)
577
Off Course (ON/OFF)
578
Off Course (Bearing)
579
Arrival Last WPT (ON/OFF)
580
Arrival Last WPT (Time)
581
Timer (ON/OFF)
582
Timer (Time)
583
Vector (ON/OFF)
584
Vector (Length)
585
Vector (Length - Units)
586
Vector (Width)
587
Sector (ON/OFF)
588
Sector (Radius)
589
Sector (Radius - Units)
590
Sector (Width)
591
Traffic Separation Zone
592
(Area)
Traffic Crossing
593
Traffic Roundabout
594
Traffic Precautionary
595
Two Way Traffic
596
Deeper Water Route
597
Recommended Traffic Lane
Reference
9-80

No.
598
Category
Contents
Set when starting
Inshore Traffic Zone
(Area)
Fairway
600
Restricted Area
601
Caution Area
602
Offshore Production Area
603
Military Practice Area
604
Seaplane Landing Area
605
Submarine Transit Area
606
Ice Area
607
Channel
608
Fishing Ground
609
Fishing Prohibited
610
Pipeline Area
611
Cable Area
612
Anchorage Area
613
Anchorage Prohibited
614
Spoil Ground
615
Dumping Ground
616
Dredge Area
617
Cargo Transshipment Area
618
Incineration Area
619
Specially Protected Area
System Alarm
621
Operation Miss
622
Key Ack
623
Setting Alarm
624
Navigation Alarm - High
625
Navigation Alarm - Mid
Navigation Alarm - Low
Select Device
(blank)
Select Port
Local
Binary (ON/OFF)
OFF
Main
599
Setting - Buzzer Setting
620
626
627
Servicem
628
an
Line Monitor
629
630
Installation - Installation
Date
631
Information
Company
Name
Length
634
Beam
635
GPS1 (ON/OFF)
636
GPS1 (X)
637
GPS1 (Y)
638
GPS2 (ON/OFF)
639
GPS2 (X)
640
GPS2 (Y)
632
633
Installation - CCRP Setting
9-81
Reference
ECDIS

No.
Category
640
Servicem
641
an
Contents
Set when starting
GPS3 (ON/OFF)
GPS3 (X)
642
GPS3 (Y)
643
GPS4 (ON/OFF)
644
GPS4 (X)
645
GPS4 (Y)
646
Radar Anntena1 (ON/OFF)
647
Radar Anntena1 (X)
648
Radar Anntena1 (Y)
649
650
Radar Anntena2 (X)
651
Radar Anntena2 (Y)
652
653
Radar Anntena3 (X)
654
Radar Anntena3 (Y)
655
656
Radar Anntena4 (X)
657
Radar Anntena4 (Y)
658
659
Radar Anntena5 (X)
660
Radar Anntena5 (Y)
661
662
Radar Anntena6 (X)
663
Radar Anntena6 (Y)
664
665
Radar Anntena7 (X)
666
Radar Anntena7 (Y)
667
668
Radar Anntena8 (X)
669
Radar Anntena8 (Y)
670
CCRP1 (X)
671
CCRP1 (Y)
672
CCRP2 (X)
673
CCRP2 (Y)
674
CCRP3 (X)
675
CCRP3 (Y)
676
CCRP4 (X)
677
CCRP4 (Y)
678
CCRP (select point)
Installation - CCRP Setting
679
Reference
9-82

No.
Category
680
Servicem
681
an
Ship's parameter
Contents
Set when starting
Length
Beam
682
Maximum Course Change
683
Maximum Speed Limit
684
Minimum Speed Limit
685
Maximum ROT
686
Minimum ROT
Reach Offset
Safety / Limit Check
687
TCS Maintenance
688
(ON/OFF)
689
690
Radar Initial Setup
Time / Distance to WPT
Signal Processing - Echo
Noise Level
691
Signal Processing - Setting
Mode
692
MBS - MBS Level
693
MBS - MBS Area
694
Data Backup/Restore Backup
695
Data Backup/Restore Restore
ECDIS
9-83
Reference
Reference
9-84
10
Maintenance
and
Inspection
10-1
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off

the power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately
turn off the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.
Notes:
Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene, alcohol, gasoline,
thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will cause the LCD surface to be
damaged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube
lightly.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as thinner or
benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.

Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.
10 Maintenance and Inspection
10-2
10.1 Confirming Alarm

If a HARD alarm occurs, a hardware failure has been detected in this system.
Perform the following confirmation procedure:
The ECDIS Unit:

(1)
Confirmation procedure
1) Display the alarm list and read the detailed
information.
(For how to display the alarm list, see 3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
2) After reading the detailed information displayed in red, immediately perform the shutdown
process to turn off the power.
3) Ask the JRC sales representative or our local office for repair, reporting the alarm information.
(2) Explanation of hardware alarm messages

Fan(CPU)
: The CPU fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
CPU High TEMP.
: The CPU temperature has risen too high. (Repair needed)
Fan(Main PWR)
: The power supply unit (CBD-1627) fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
Fan(ATX PWR)
: The ATX power supply unit fan has been stopped. (Repair
Fan(LCD)
: The monitor fan of the display panels chassis (CWB-1210) has
needed)
been stopped. (Repair needed)
DISK1 Error
: Hard disk 1 has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK2 Error
: Hard disk 2 has failed. (Repair needed)
ECDIS
10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance

The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily
maintenance. To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it
daily. This also prevents the unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.
Maintenance and Inspection Method

No.
1
Item
Cleaning
Inspection Item
Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth.
In
particular, wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.
2
Inspection
Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the monitor to make sure that
the brightness of the monitor increases.
Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure
that dials operate smoothly.
Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the
lighting on the panel changes correctly.
Select [Color Pattern] to display the color test pattern, and adjust the
brightness/contrast. Also make sure that the necessary colors come
out on the monitor.
Select [Gray Scale] to display the gray scale pattern, and make sure that
the gray scale is displayed correctly.
10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)

The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select the Color Pattern in the startup menu.
The color pattern becomes activated.
[Startup Menu]
[Color Pattern]
The color pattern can be displayed using any of the five color tables.
This color pattern is intended:
(a) For use by the mariner to check and if necessary re-adjust the brilliance and contrast
controls, particularly for use at night.
(b) For use by the mariner to satisfy himself that an again ECDIS CRT remains capable of
providing the necessary color differentiation.
(c) For initial color verification of the day-black-background, dusk and night color table.
2) Right-click to see the context menu.
ECDIS
Day Bright:
A day-time color pattern will be displayed.
Day Whiteback: A relatively bright color pattern will be displayed.

Day Blackback:
A color pattern against a black background will be displayed.
Dusk:
A relatively dark color pattern will be displayed.
Night:
A night-time color pattern will be displayed.
Exit:
Exit the color pattern display and return to the startup menu.
3) Left-click on [Exit] from the context menu to exit the color pattern.
10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale

A gray scale pattern is displayed to check the brightness adjustment of the monitor.
Optimum brightness of the monitor can be obtained by adjusting the brightness so that the gray scale
pattern can be viewed clearly. The brightness of the monitor in the nighttime can also be optimally
adjusted in the same way.
1) Select the Gray Scale in the startup menu.
The gray scale becomes activated.
[Startup Menu]
[Gray Scale]
2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale. The startup menu will start up.
10.3 Replacing Consumables

The hard disk, UPS battery and LCD backlight used in this system have a limited service life, so that they
should better be replaced periodically.
The expected service lives of these parts if the system is used constantly are as follows:
Number
Part
Hard disk
UPS battery
Nominal life
Two years
Three years
Remarks
When the power supply is on constantly.
If the
system is not used for long periods and battery

charging/discharging is repeated, then the nominal life
may be shorter.
3
LCD backlight
Five years
Lithium battery
Five years
CPU fan
Four years

Please consult with the store, sales agent or our branch office, sales offices or outlets for replacing the
above parts.
10-6
10.4
The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input
When AC power supply is stopped due to a blackout or the like, nothing is displayed on the monitor, but
the display information is backed up for one minute. If AC power is not supplied when one minute has
passed, the system will automatically start the shutdown process to terminate all the functions.
The following table shows the relations between the PWR FAIL lamp states and alarm sound while AC
power is not being supplied:
Inboard Backup Power Supply (24 VDC)
PWR FAIL Lamp
Alarm Sound
Connected
Blinking *1
Yes *2
Not connected
No change
No
*1: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key changes the lamp state to lighted. The lamp goes off when AC
power is supplied.
*2: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key stops the alarm.
ECDIS
10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu

When you left-click the [
] button on the startup menu and the following message is displayed, change
the setting of the user maintenance menu.
10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance

Menu
(1) Method of Displaying the User Maintenance Menu
1) Move the cursor onto the startup menu. And right-click.
2) Password is required.
3) Input 0000 as the password. And left-click the [OK].
10-8
4) The startup menu is expanded, and the user maintenance menu is displayed.
[<< Hide]
User maintenance menu is hidden.
[Disk Information/Backup]
Confirmation of Disk Information and
data can be backup.
[Hardware Key Information]
Hardware Key Information can be
confirmed.
[CD Cleaner]
DVD Drive can be cleaned with an
attached Cleaning CD.
(2) Method of Hiding the User Maintenance Menu

1) Left-click the [<< Hide].
ECDIS
2) The user maintenance menu is hidden.
10-9
10.5.2 Disk Information

In this function, drive information and file information can be confirmed.
10.5.2.1 Drive Information

Total capacity and free space of System, Master and Backup disk are displayed.
1) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] in user maintenance menu.
Then, the "Disk Information" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] tab.
3) Left-click the radio button of [Drive Information].
Then, the Drive Information is display.
System(C:)
Total: Total capacity of system
drive.
Free: Free space of system
drive.
Master(D:)
Total: Total capacity of master
drive.
Free: Free space of master
drive.
Backup(E:)
Total: Total capacity of Backup drive.
Free: Free space of Backup drive.
4) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the Disk Information panel.
10-10
10.5.2.2 File Information

Volumes of Chart, Logging Data, and User files saved in the system are displayed.
1) Left-click the [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.
Then, the "Disk Information" panel will appear.

2) After left-clicking the [Disk Information] tab, Disk Information is display.
Chart:
Used space of each Chart
Logging Data:
Used space of each Logging Data
User Files:
Used space of each User Files
Master [MB]:
Backup [MB]:
Each used space of Master drive.
Each used space of Backup drive.

ECDIS
4) Left-click the [Cancel] to close the Disk Information panel.
10-11
10.5.3 Setting HDD organization

In this function, HDD organization can be set.
1) Left-click [Disk Information/Backup] in User Maintenance menu.
2) After selecting Drive Organization" tab, HDD organization can be set.
Dual drive: Chart installed path is set

both D and E. The according chart path
is set D.
Master drive: Chart installed path and
according chart path is set D.
Chart installed path and
chart path is set E.
10-12
according
10.5.4 Hardware Key Information

This function is useful for confirming User Permit No. and PIN No. And, information can be saved on the
floppy disk.
These information will be needed as purchasing ARCS chart and S-63 chart.
How to Confirming / Saving Hardware Key Information

1) Left-click [Hardware Key Information] in User Maintenance menu.
Then, the Hardware Key Information panel is display.
Each information is displayed

here.
[Close]
Close this panel.
[Save to FD]
Hardware key information can
be saved on the floppy disk.
ECDIS
2) Insert an empty disk into the floppy disk drive.

3) Left-click the [Save to FD]
Then, save to floppy disk is started.
Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.
4) When save is completed, left-click the [Close] to close the Hardware Key Information panel.
10-13
10.5.5 CD Cleaner
This function is DVD drive can be cleaned with an attached Cleaning CD.
Note:
We recommend cleaning DVD Drive every month at least, otherwise system might be unable to
read Chart CD correctly, and fail to import/Update charts.
How to Cleaning the DVD Drive

1) Cleaning CD is set in the DVD Drive.
2) Left-click [CD Cleaner] in User Maintenance menu.
When be displayed the following message, try to set Cleaning CD.
3) The following message is displayed, and the cleaning starts.

The cleaning stops when the message is close.
4) Left-click the [OK] to close the message and stop cleaning.
10-14
10.6 Recovery by Image File
Execute the system restoration by Recovery Boot CD after understanding

working of reading Recovery Boot CD enough well.
When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, it might
cause the breakdown.
Do not restore the system with tools other than attached Recovery Boot CD. It
might cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
Use the Recovery Boot CD which is attached each device.
When using the Recovery Boot CD which is attached other device, it might
cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
The system file of JAN-701B/901B is saved on the flash disk. It becomes impossible to start
JAN-701B/901B normally when the system file on the flash disk is destroyed by some causes.
The following "Deployment procedure of the system image by Recovery Boot CD" is the method of the
return to the state when the system file is shipped in the factory was described.
The system that was not able to start normally can be restored and be started by this procedure.
Note
When the flash disk is physically out of order, it is not possible to restore it.
After the system is restored, it is not possible to start normally when the hard disk is out of order.
When an upgrade of software or an individual sensor setting is changed after the factory is shipped, all
those changes are deleted.
The setting of the sensor after the system is restored becomes set when the factory is shipped.
ECDIS
10-15
Use of [Recovery Boot CD]

Deployment procedure of system image by Recovery Boot CD
Recovery Boot CD is distinguished old type for using old processing unit (NCM-860) and new type for
using new processing unit (NCM-860A). Each recovery Boot CD is printed as follows.
JMA-900B
JAN-701B/901B
Recovery Boot CD
JMA-900B
JAN-701B/901B
Recovery Boot CD
For
NCM-860A
H-7ZZNA4026
H-7ZZNA4105
Recovery Boot CD
For old processing unit (NCM-860)
Recovery Boot CD
For old processing unit (NCM-860A)
In case of using Recovery Boot CD for old processing unit; see 10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in
In case of using Recovery Boot CD for new processing unit; see 10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in
case of old processing unit (NCM-860).

case of new processing unit (NCM-860A).
10-16
10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in case of old

processing unit (NCM-860)
(1) Turn on the power supply of JAN-701B/901B, and turn off the power supply after inserting the
boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] into the DVD drive.
(2) Confirm Disk information when the power supply of JAN-701B/901B is turned on, and the following
message is displayed.
--------------------------------------------------------Disk information
--------------------------------------------------------Disk:1 (1.90GB) M:[HAGIWARA SYS-COM NFD25-02GBI] S:[HSCI02G07Y0200000700]
1.1 (1.90GB)
Active Volume NTFS Primary
(2.95MB) Unused Space Primary
Disk:2 (76.69GB) M:[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380] S:[PVC200Z30GK6NJ]
2.1 (76.69GB)
Active Volume NTFS l:[Local Disk] Primary
( 2.46MB) Unused Space Primary
Disk:3 (76.69GB) M:[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380] S:[PVC200Z3S2W56J]
3.1 (76.69GB)
Active Volume NTFS l:[New Volume] Primary
( 2.46MB) Unused Space Primary
--------------------------------------------------------..
--------------------------------------------------------Recovery Boot CD
For JAN-701B/901B
ver.1.0
--------------------------------------------------------Restore Image file from CD to System Drive (Disk:1)
.
1) Remove Boot CD.
2) Insert CD-R "JAN-701B/901B Recovery Image" printed.
3) Wait for a few seconds.
4) Left-click to continue.....
Confirm the System disk construction below.
Disk1[HAGIWARA SYS-COM NFD25-02GBI]
Type of Flash Disk
Disk2[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380]
Type of Hard Disk
Disk3[Hitachi HDS721680PLA380]
ECDIS
Type of Hard Disk

The type of disk might be different depending on the shipping time. Confirm the content of
the composition becomes Disk1/2, and the Disk1 is flash disk.
Recovery Boot CD deploys [Recovery Image CD] with Disk1.
The flash disk and the hard disk will be subjected to change in the future. In that case,
the type of different from the above-mentioned is displayed.
The power supply is turned off pushing the power switch of JAN-701B/901B long when
the composition of Disk1/2 has reversed. Push the Ctrl+C key to the keyboard again
after the power supply is turned on, and the JRC logo is displayed.
Execute the following operation after confirming the Disk composition is restored.
When either or neither of Disk1/2 is displayed, the breakdown of the drive etc. are
thought. In that case, do not execute the following operation until the breakdown
etc. are resolved.
When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, all charts etc. of
the import settlement are deleted.
10-17
(3) Push the eject button of the DVD drive, and eject the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD].
(4) Insert the [Recovery Image CD] into DVD drive.
(5) Wait for blinking LED of the DVD drive to stop, and click a left button of the mouse or the track ball.
(6) GHOST starts, and the copy of the system from [Recovery Image CD] to Flash Disk is begun on the
automatic operation.
(7) After the copy of the system is complete, the following messages are displayed.
Eject [Recovery Image CD] of the DVD drive, push the POWER switch of JAN-701B/901B
long, and turn off the power supply.
_______________________________________________________________________________
.
* Remove FD and CD-R.
* KEEP pressing [POWER] button until power off.
____
I
I
--+
+-
/
/
/
/
[ POWER ]
_______________________________________________________________________________
After turning on the power supply again, confirm that the system starts normally, and ends the
system recovery operation.
10-18
10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in case of new

processing unit (NCM-860A)
(1) Turn on the power supply of JAN-701B/901B, and turn off the power supply after inserting the
boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] into the DVD drive.
(2) Turn on the power supply of JAN-701B/901B again, and then push the eject button of the DVD
drive, and eject the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] after following message is displayed.
Under initialization. Please wait for a while.
The command completed successfully.
Microsoft (R) Windows Script host Version 5.7
Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All right reserved.
--------------------------------------------------------Disk information
--------------------------------------------------------Disk:0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
Disk:1(152625MB). [Hitachi HDS721016CLA382 ATA Device]
..
--------------------------------------------------------Restore
JAN-701B/901B Recovery Boot
DVD Image file from DVD to System Drive(Disk:0)
1) Remove Boot DVD.
ver.1.0
2) Insert DVD-R JAN-701B/901B Recovery Image (For NCM-860A) printed.
--------------------------------------------------------3) Wait for a few seconds.
4) Click OK button to continue.
OK
Message
Confirm the System disk construction below.
Disk:0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
Type of Flash Disk
Type of Hard Disk
Type of Hard Disk
Recovery Boot CD deploys [Recovery Image CD] with Disk0.
The flash disk and the hard disk will be subjected to change in the future. In that case,
the type of different from the above-mentioned is displayed.
The power supply is turned off pushing the power switch of JAN-701B/901B long when
the composition of Disk0/1 has reversed. Push the Ctrl+R key to the keyboard again
after the power supply is turned on, and the JRC logo is displayed.
Execute the following operation after confirming the Disk composition is restored.
When either or neither of Disk1/2 is displayed, the breakdown of the drive etc. are
thought. In that case, do not execute the following operation until the breakdown
etc. are resolved.
When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, all charts etc. of
the import settlement are deleted.
10-19
ECDIS
(3) Insert the [Recovery Image CD] into DVD drive.

(4) Wait for blinking LED of the DVD drive to stop, and left-click [OK] button.
Restore Image file from DVD to System Drive(Disk:0)

1) Remove Boot DVD.
2) Insert DVD-R JAN-701B/901B Recovery Image (For NCM-860A) printed.
3) Wait for a few seconds.
4) Click OK button to continue.
OK
(5) GHOST starts, and the copy of the system from [Recovery Image CD] to Flash Disk is begun on the
automatic operation.
(6) After the copy of the system is complete, the following messages are displayed.
Eject [Recovery Image CD] of the DVD drive, push the POWER switch of JAN-701B/901B
long, and turn off the power supply.
Disk:0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
..
--------------------------------------------------------JAN-701B/901B Recovery Boot DVD
ver.1.0
--------------------------------------------------------_______________________________________________________________________________
.
* Remove DVD-ROM.
* KEEP pressing [POWER] button until power off.
____
I
I
--+
+-
/
/
/
/
[ POWER ]
_______________________________________________________________________________
X:windowssystem32>
After turning on the power supply again, confirm that the system starts normally, and ends the
system recovery operation.
10-20
10.7 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before
you ask for repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is
not in order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.
Trouble
Symptom
Power does not turn ON.
Cause
Remedy
The AC power is not ON.
Turn the AC power ON.
The breaker in the main unit
Turn the breaker ON. *
power supply is not ON.

When 220V input is being used,
Switch the input protective
the input protective circuit switch
circuit switch to AC 220V.
of the power supply is set to AC

110V.
AC power is not being input
Input AC power within the rated
within the rated range.
range.
The AC power cable is not
Call the JRC sales
connected to the main unit.
representative for repair.
Malfunction of main unit.
Call the JRC sales

POWER FAIL lamp is lit.
DC power is not being supplied
Supply DC power from the
from the distribution board.
distribution board.
The AC voltage has dropped.
Input AC voltage within the rated

range.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Lift the lever to turn the breaker ON
ECDIS
Breaker
ON: Up
OFF: Down
10-21
Trouble continued-Symptom
FAN alarm message is
Cause
The fan motor has stopped.
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Remedy
Immediately turn the power OFF,
and contact the nearest JRC
office or agent, and ask for
repair.
Nothing is displayed on screen.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The power switch is not ON.
Turn the power switch ON.
The monitor has malfunctioned.
Call the JRC sales

Incorrect display
The display is shown out of
The video cable is not
Call the JRC sales
connected.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Call the JRC sales
connected. (terminal fault)
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The initial setup was faulty.
For JAN-701, keep the brilliance
place.
control pressed for a while. The

display will be adjusted
automatically.
For JAN-901M, press the
brilliance control. The display
will be adjusted automatically.
Radar echo is not displayed
Call the JRC sales
correctly.
connected. (terminal fault)
The connector cable is not
Call the JRC sales
connected to the radar.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Chart Portfolio is working.
Stop Chart Portfolio.
Gyro compass is not displayed,
The initial setup has not been
Carry out the initial setup
and "GYRO" alarm is
carried out correctly.
correctly.
displayed.
The gyro compass is not ON.
Turn the gyro compass ON.
Check the connection between
connected to the gyro compass.
the gyro compass and main unit.
The ratio setting on the gyro
Set the ratio setting on the gyro
compass is incorrect.
compass correctly.
The polarities of the connector
Connect the cable at the correct
cable are incorrect.
polarities.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
10-22
Cause
Rudder angle is not displayed.
The rudder angle indicator is not
Turn the rudder angle indicator
Or, is not displayed correctly.
ON.
ON.
The ratio setting on the rudder
Set the ratio setting on the
angle is incorrect.
rudder angle.
The rudder angle indicator
Set the rudder angle indicator
setting is incorrect.
correctly.
connected to the rudder angle
the rudder angle indicator and
indicator.
the main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The log is not ON.
Turn the log ON.
The ratio setting on the log is
Set the ratio setting on the log
incorrect.
correctly.
connected to the log.
the log and the main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Data is not displayed, even
The analog data setup has not
Carry out the analog data setup
though the data below is input.
been set correctly.
correctly.
Relative wind direction and
The interface board is not ON.
Turn the interface board ON.
Air temperature
Water temperature
connected to the interface
the interface board and the main
Pitch
board.
unit.
Roll
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
CPP angle
malfunctioned.
Position information (e.g. GPS,
gyro) is not displayed.
correctly.
The navigation unit is not
Check the state of the navigation
measuring.
unit.
The navigation unit is not ON.
Turn the navigation unit ON.
connected to the navigation unit.
the navigation unit and the main
Log is not displayed.
Remedy
wind speed
unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
10-23
ECDIS
ARPA is not displayed.
Cause
Remedy
The [ARPA] key is not pressed.
Press the [ARPA] key.
The ARPA setting is incorrect.
Set the ARPA setting correctly.
The radar is not turned ON.
Turn the radar ON.
connected to the radar.
the radar and main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Wind direction, wind speed
The digital wind direction and air
Turn the digital wind direction
(digital wind direction and air
speedometer are not ON.
and air speedometer ON.
speedometer) are not
The connector cables are not
displayed.
connected to the digital wind
the digital wind direction and air
direction and air speedometer.
speedometer.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The depth sounder is not ON.
Turn the depth sounder ON.
connected to the depth sounder.
the depth sounder and the main
UKC is not displayed.
unit.
Engine data from data logger
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The data logger is not ON.
Turn the data logger ON.
connected to the data logger.
the main unit and the data
and weather data are not

displayed.
logger.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Automatic sailing is not
possible.
correctly.
Operation is not carried out
Carry out the correct operation
correctly.
referring to the Instruction

Manual.
The autopilot is not ON.
Turn the autopilot ON.
connected to the autopilot.
the autopilot and the main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
10-24
Cause
Remedy
The brightness does not
The lighting control circuit does
Call the JRC sales
change even if the
not work.
[BRILLIANCE] knob is turned.
The cable is damaged.
Call the JRC sales

The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
None of the keys on the
The cursor is displayed as an
Wait until the hourglass returns
operation panel work.
hourglass.
to a cursor.
The operation panel circuit is
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioning.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The trackball is dirty.
Clean the trackball.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do
The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are
Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.
not work even if turned. Or,
not ready for operation.
response is slow.
The knob is not secured to the
Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft.
secure the knob to the shaft.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and
Press the [RADAR] key.
[SEA/RAIN] dials do not work
[SEA/RAIN] dials are not ready
even if turned. Or, response is
for operation.
slow.
The knob is not secured to the
Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft.
secure the knob to the shaft.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Hard disk failure
See 13.5 User Maintenance
The trackball does not work.
When the [
] (Navigation &
Planning) button in the startup
Menu.
menu, the message Path is

incorrect or Master Drive is
failed is displayed.
The power was turned off
Chart index failure
Start Chart Portfolio, select
during ARCS index creation by
[Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regenerate
Chart Portfolio, and Navigation
Index] to create the chart index
& Planning cannot be started
again.
with an error message being

displayed.
10-25
ECDIS
Cause
Remedy
Error code (0XFFFFFFA) is
Wrong authorization code was
Input the proper authorization
displayed in Chart Portfolio.
input.
code you obtained again.
Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is
Reading from CD-ROM was
Clean the CD-ROM, and
displayed while ARCS chart is
faulty.
perform the import procedure
imported in Chart Portfolio.
again. If the error persists, the

CD-ROM or CD-ROM drive may
be out of order.
Contact the distributor of the
chart to request for replacement
of CD-ROM, or contact the JRC
sales representative to request
repair of the CD-ROM drive.
When the [
] (Navigation &
Dongle (key lock device) is
Call the JRC sales
Planning) button is left-clicked
broken or the information of
in the startup menu, the
Dongle and Software are not
message ECDIS License
matched.
Invalid is displayed.
ARCS chart is not displayed.
Chart is imported when the term
Register the latest Chart Permit
of validity of ARCS has expired.
within the expiration date, and
Chart Permit was registered
then import ARCS chart.
when the term of validity of

ARCS has expired.
PIN input was canceled when
Input PIN when starting
Navigation & Planning was
Navigation & Planning, and
started.
select ARCS chart. ([Menu] [Chart] - [Option] - [S57/C-MAP/

ARCS])
ARCS chart will not be
Chart Permit type was changed
Contact the retailer from whom
displayed, though it has been
from trial version to regular
ARCS was purchased to check
displayed normally by that time.
contract.
the details of the contract.
Details of contract were

changed.
Alarm occurs frequently while
ECDIS has detected the alarm
ARCS chart is displayed.
information regarding ARCS

chart itself and displayed the
alarm.
Check the details of the alarm.

See 10.2.1 Alarm Information of
ARCS Chart.
Error message
Index was not generated in
Re-generate Index in Chart
????Earcs.dll???? is
Chart Portfolio for such reasons
Portfolio. ([Chart] - [ARCS] -
displayed when Navigation &
as forced termination of this
[Regenerate Index])
Planning is started.
equipment during ARCS Index

generation.
10-26
Cause
Remedy
eToken panel is displayed in Navigation &
It is an authentication
Planning or Chart Portfolio, and a password is
procedure when C-MAP
demanded.
security device (eToken)
Press Cancel button.
is accessed.
Message C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token)
C-MAP security device
Press [POWER] to exit
not found is displayed in Navigation &
(eToken) was not
software and OS, and
Planning.
recognized.
then, press [POWER]

again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message System detected non response from
Press [POWER] to exit
security device (eToken),and needs to reboot.
(eToken) was not
software and OS, and
Please press [POWER] button shutdown. is
recognized.
then, press [POWER]
again to start ECDIS

again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message Confirm CD type, and retry Auto
A CD is not inserted in
Insert the chart CD into
Detect. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
the CD-ROM drive.
the CD-ROM drive.
The CD in the CD-ROM

drive is not a chart CD.
Message CD is not inserted, or this CD might
The path setting is
have errors. Confirm, or contact with your chart
wrong.
Set the path correctly.
provider. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
10-27
ECDIS
Cause
Remedy
On the Chart Portfolio
C-MAP
System detected non response from security
device (eToken) is not
security
finish
device (eToken), and needs to reboot.
accepted
OS.Re-start by pushing
Push POWER key to

software
Please press [POWER] button shutdown.
POWERKey
message is displayed
Dont
keep
and
pressing
POWER key
On the Chart Manager
DVD is not inserted into Insert DVD into DVD
No database found at specified location

message is displayed
DVD drive
On the Chart Manager
C-MAP security device Push POWER key to

(eToken) is not accepted finish
software
and
Key is not plugged inmessage is displayed
drive
OS.Re-start by pushing
POWERKey
Dont keep pressing
POWER key
C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not displayed.
The eToken license is
Register the latest valid
invalid.
eToken license and

import C-MAP Ed.3
chart. (See 10.2.2 Alarm
Information of C-MAP
Ed.3 Chart.)
10-28
Cause
Remedy
C-MAP Ed.3 chart that used to be displayed is
The details of the
Ask your C-MAP Ed.3
no longer displayed.
license agreement have
distributor for the details.
been changed.
Startup Menu is in hang-up state.
Install C-MAP security
(eToken) is not installed.
device (eToken).
Message error (0xFFFFFFFA) or Error: Bad
Authorization code is
Enter the received autho-
Authorization Code or file format error is
wrong.
rization code again.
A chart list is not displayed with Chart Portfolio.
Selectable Filter is set.
Turn off Selectable Filter.
Message Insert another C-MAP Ed.2 CD. is
Selected zones are not
Select zones under
under contract.
contract, and import/
displayed in the log window of Chart Portfolio.
update data.
Message error (0x000000xx) is displayed in
See 10.2.3 Alarm
the log window of Chart Portfolio.
Information of S-57/S-63 Information of S-57/S-63

Chart.
10-29
See 10.2.3 Alarm

Chart.
ECDIS
Cause
Remedy
Message There is no licensed chart. is
This CD does not contain
Insert the licensed CD
any licensed charts.
into the CD-ROM drive.
Message Warning SA public key supplied on
The selected SA Certifi-
Select the SA Certificate
the ENC media unmatches the pre-installed SA cate file is incorrect.
file relevant to the data
public key. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
server.
Message Errors occurred in Decryption! Refer
Cell Permit is not
Import correct Cell
the log to check the detail. is displayed in
imported yet.
Permit.
Chart Portfolio.
Imported Cell Permit is

incorrect.
Cell Permit has been
deleted.
Cell Permit has already
expired.
10-30
11
Operation of
Multi Window
11-1
11.1 Operation of Multi Window

11.1.1 Selecting Multi Window
Multi Window can be select in the following way. (This is optional function.)
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to display more than the menu, the
supporting menu has a check mark and the panel is displayed.
Preset the multi window display condition:

The condition of the multi window can be saved and presented.
Save the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(7) PreSet Save] in that order.
It maintains the display condition and the display position of the present multi window. When
doing the same operation once again from the menu, the display condition and the display
position maintain new one.
Preset the multi window condition:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(1) PreSet] in that order.
It presets the display condition and the display position of the multi window to have maintained.
11 Operation of Multi Window
11-2
2) In the [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key

Multi Window function can be assigned to the [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Option Key Setting] in that order.
The [Option Key] dialog box will be displayed.
Multi Window
After registering, push the assigned key.
USER
OPTION
1
11-3
OPTION
2
11.2 Configuration for Each Graph

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(0) Setup...] in that order, and the Setup panel will be
displayed. Press a tab written the name of the block will change each display block setting.
Engineer can only set each data display On/Off by entering Password in Maintenance window.
These buttons are common buttons of the Setup panel.
[Exit] button:
Exit the Conning Display and display Startup screen.
[OK] button:
Accept settings and close Setup panel.
[Cancel] button: Cancel change setting and close Setup panel.
Click tab of setting block
11-4
11.2.1Course BarTab
Multi Window
[Range of Bar]: Setting angle range of course bar.
11.2.2ClimateTab
11-5
11.2.3Ship (Voyage)Tab
11.2.4Ship(Docking)Tab
[Speed Range at Docking]: Setting maximum of ship speed at Docking.
11-6
11.2.5Current/WindTab
Multi Window
11.2.6Depth GraphTab
[Graph Depth Range at Voyage]:

Setting depth range of Depth graph at Voyage.
[Graph Depth Range at Docking]:
Setting depth range of Depth graph at Docking.
[Graph Time Range]:
Setting time range of Depth graph.
11-7
11.2.7Engine GraphTab
[Graph Time Range]: Setting time range of engine graph.

[Upper RPM]:
Setting upper rpm range of engine graph.
[Lower RPM]:
Setting lower rpm range of engine graph.
11.2.8Gyro/RudderTab
[Graph Time Range]: Setting time range of course rudder graph.

[Rudder Range]:
Setting rudder angle range of course rudder graph.
11-8
11.2.9DraftTab
Multi Window
11.2.10CurrentTab
11-9
11.2.11Menu ControlTab
11-10
12
Display and View
of
Multi Window
12-1
12.1 Display of Each Information

12.1.1 Display of Navigation Information
The navigation information is displayed in blocks on the screen. For details, see 12.2.1 View of
Navigation Information.
Note:
The number and type of display blocks, and display items in each block differ depending on the
system configuration used.
(Sample Display Example)
(1) Course Bar Block
(9) Current Block
(2) Climate Block

(3) Draft Block
(7) Ship Block

(4) Current Wind Block
(5) Gyro Rudder

Graph Block
(8) Depth Graph Block
(6) Engine Graph Block
The items displayed in each block are as follows.

No.
(1)
Blocks
Course Bar Block
(2)
(3)
(4)
Climate Block
Draft Block
Current/Wind Block
(5)
(6)
(7)
True
Relative
Gyro/Rudder Graph Block
Engine Graph Block
Ship Block
Docking
Voyage
(8)
(9)
Depth Graph Block

Current Block
Displayed Items
Planned course, gyro course, course, course to steer (CTS), rate of turn
(ROT)
Air temperature, water temperature, atmospheric pressure, humidity
Forward draft, middle draft (starboard, port), after draft
True wind, true tidal stream
Relative wind, Relative tidal stream
Rudder angle (starboard, port), gyro course
Engine revolution
Ship speed (ahead/astern, bow starboard/port direction, stern starboard/
port direction), rudder (starboard, port), stern thruster pitch angle (starboard, port), bow thruster pitch angle (starboard, port), stern thruster
rotational speed (starboard, port), bow thruster rotational speed
(starboard, port), stern thruster output (starboard, port), bow thruster
output (starboard, port)
Rudder (starboard, port), ship speed (ground, water), planned ship speed,
propeller pitch angle (starboard, port), propeller rotational speed
(starboard, port)
Water depth
Water depth, current drift, current set
12 Display and View of Multi Window
12-2
12.1.1.1 Rearranging Blocks

The blocks can be dragged and dropped. The screen is broken down into a transparent matrix made up
of 64 equally sized sections. A block can be moved to a give part of the matrix by aligning its upper left
corner.
Blocks
12.1.1.2 Changing Block Size
Conning Display
The size of a block can be changed by placing the cursor over a corner of the block, then dragging the
corner to resize the block. (However, there is a limit to the size that is determined by the mesh size,
displayed characters.)
12-3
12.2 View of Each Information

12.2.1 View of Navigation Information
This section describes the screen configuration and displayed items of the block that displays navigation
information.
(1) Course Bar Block

1)
3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4) 2) 5)
1) Planned Course
The course in the navigation plan that was programmed into the ECDIS system is displayed by
the mark.
2) Gyro (Gyro course)
The ships heading according to the gyro compass is displayed.
3) Course
The course from GPS is displayed.
4) CTS (Course to steer)
When the route tracking mode is selected in the ECDIS, the course used for automatic sailing is
displayed by the mark.
5) ROT (Rate of turn)*1
The rate of turn per minute is displayed.
The full span value of the displayed graph can be set to 30, 60, 90, 120 or 150 degrees/minute
from the Setup panel.
*1 ROT is displayed when this information is sent from the gyro compass.
12-4
(2) Climate Block

1)
2)
3)
4)
1) Air Temp. (Air temperature)

The measurement from the temperature sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a temperature sensor.
2) Water Temp. (Water temperature)
The measurement from the water temperature sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a seawater temperature sensor or data
logger.
3) Pressure (Atmospheric pressure)
The measurement from the atmospheric pressure sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to an atmospheric pressure sensor.
4) Humidity
The measurement from the humidity sensor placed outside the vessel is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a humidity sensor.
(3) Draft Block

1)
2)
3)
1) Fore Draft (forward draft)

The measurement from the draft sensor placed outside the vessel on the fore body is displayed.
No measurement is displayed if this unit is not connected to the draft sensor.
2) Mid draft (middle draft --- both starboard and port sides)
The measurements from the draft sensors placed outside the vessel amid ship on both
starboard and port sides are displayed.
No measurement is displayed if this unit is not connected to the draft sensors.
3) Aft Draft (after draft)
The measurement from the draft sensor placed outside the vessel on the aft body is displayed.
No measurement is displayed if this unit is not connected to the draft sensor.
12-5
Conning Display
(4) Current/Wind Block

1)
1)
2)
Relative
6)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
1)
1)
True
6)
5)
5)
3)
3)
7)
7)
1) Wind Direction
True wind direction or relative wind direction is displayed in 16 bearings and graphically.
Direction of arrowhead means following wind direction.
True wind direction and relative wind direction can be switched by clicking the [True/Relative]
switching button at the bottom right of this block.
2) Wind Speed
True wind speed or relative wind speed is displayed in meters per second (m/sec).
True wind speed and relative wind speed can be switched by clicking the [True/Relative]
switching button at the bottom right of the screen.
The unit of wind speed can be switched back and forth between meters per second (m/sec) and
nautical miles per hour (kn) by clicking the [m/s/kn] switching button.
3) Current Set (current direction)
True current direction or relative current direction is displayed in 16 bearings and graphically.
Direction of arrowhead means following current direction.
True current direction and relative current direction can be switched by clicking the
[True/Relative] switching button at the bottom right of the screen.
4) Current Drift (current speed)
True current speed or relative current speed is displayed in knots (Knots).
True current speed and relative current speed can be switched by clicking the [True/Relative]
switching button at the bottom right of the screen.
5) Own Ship
The own ship direction is displayed together with the wind direction and current direction.
6) [m/s/kn] switching button
The display of wind speed unit can be switched back and forth between meters per second
(m/sec) and nautical miles per hour (kn) by clicking the [m/s/kn] switching button.
7) [True/Relative] switching button
Wind direction, wind speed, current direction, current speed and tidal stream can be switched
back and forth between true and relative display by clicking the [True/Relative] switching button.
All data will be switched when this button is clicked.
12-6
(5) Gyro/Rudder Graph Block
Conning Display
Gyro/Rudder (Gyro course, Rudder (starboard/port))

This graph displays the gyro course of the ship, and changes in true rudder angle over time.
The number of true rudder angles and recording time intervals can be set from the Setup panel.
The display range of the rudder angle available are 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 and 80. The
recording time intervals available are 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes and 30 minutes.
(6) Engine Graph Block
This graphs displays the changes in engine revolution over time.

The number of engines and recording time intervals can be set from the Setup panel. The
display range of the engine revolution available are AH100RPM, AH200RPM, AH300RPM,
AS50RPM and AS100RPM. The recording time intervals available are 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30
minutes and 60 minutes.
12-7
(7) Ship Block

Docking
1)
5)
2)
8)
9)
3)
6)
4)
7)
1) Bow Speed (bow speed of the ship to starboard or port)*1

The bow speed in the starboard and port directions from a Doppler sonar is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a Doppler sonar.
2) Fore-Aft (ahead/astern speed)*1
The ship speed in the ahead and astern directions from a Doppler sonar.
3) Stern Speed (stern speed of the ship to starboard or port)*1
The stern speed in the starboard and port directions from a Doppler sonar is displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if this unit is not connected to a Doppler sonar.
4) Rudder (true rudder angle)
The true rudder angle is displayed. Single-shaft rudder angle or double-shaft rudder angle is
selected from the initial screen.
5) Bow Thruster, Pitch/RPM/Power (bow thruster information)
Data from the thruster installed in the bow (pitch angle, rotational speed, power) is displayed.
6) Stern Thruster, Pitch/RPM/Power (stern thruster information)
Data from the thruster installed in the stern (pitch angle, rotational speed, power) is displayed.
7) [Docking/Voyage] switching button
This button can be clicked to change from the Docking screen to the Voyage screen and vice
versa.
*1 Each value is shown by * if the speeds became the speed through water.
12-8
Voyage
3)
4)
Conning Display
5)
6)
6)
1)
2)
1) Rudder (actual rudder angle)

The actual rudder angle is displayed. Single-shaft rudder angle or double-shaft rudder angle
is selected from the initial screen.
2) [Docking/Voyage] switching button
This button can be clicked to change from the Docking screen to the Voyage screen and vice
versa.
3) STW (speed through water)*1
The STW from a Doppler sonar or the EM log is displayed.
4) Speed (ground speed)
The ground speed from the GPS is displayed.
5) Planned Speed
The ship speed in the navigation plan that was set into the ECDIS is displayed.
6) Propeller (Propeller information)
The propeller pitch angle, rotational speed and output are displayed. Either a single-shaft
propeller or double-shaft propellers can be selected.
*1 The value is shown by * if the speed became the ground speed.
12-9
(8) Depth Graph Block
Depth (Keel)depth from the keel

The depth from the keel and time variation of the depth are displayed.
Depth (Surface)depth from the surface
The depth from the surface and time variation of the depth are displayed.
Depth (Tran.)depth from the transducer
The depth from the transducer and time variation of the depth are displayed.
Scale of the depth and time interval can be set in the [Setup] dialog box. Depth display range in
Docking can be selected from 10, 25 and 50 meters, depth display range in Voyage can be selected
from 50, 100 and 250 meters. There is a switch of Docking and Voyage in the Ship Block. Time
interval can be selected from 10, 15, 30 and 60 minutes.
The depth display from the keel, surface and transducer automatically switch by data from echo
sounder.
(9) Current Block
1)
2)
3)
1) Measuring Depth Rangedepth

The depth at the observation point is displayed.
2) Current Speed
The current speed at the observation point is displayed.
3) Current Direction
The current direction at the observation point is displayed.
12-10
Display Item List of Navigation Information

Block
Course Bar
Block
Climate
Block
Ship Block
Mode
Item
Planned Course
Gyro course
Course
Course to steer
Rate of turn
Weather data
Docking Ship speed
Display name
Planned Course
Gyro
Course
CTS
ROT
Air temperature Air Temp.
Water
Water Temp.
temperature
Atmospheric
Pressure
temperature
Humidity
Humidity
Bow STBD/Port Bow
Ahead/Stern
Fore-Aft
Stern
Stern
STBD/Port
Rudder angle
(Starboard)
Rudder angle (Port)
Stern Thruster pitch
angle (Starboard)
Stern Thruster pitch
angle (Port)
Bow Thruster pitch
angle (Starboard)
Bow Thruster pitch
angle (Port)
Stern Thruster
rotational speed (Port)
Bow Thruster rotational
speed (Port)
Stern Thruster output
(Port)
Bow Thruster output
(Port)
Voyage Planned speed
Ship's speed
Water speed
Ground speed
Rudder angle
(Starboard)
Rudder angle (Port)
Propeller Pitch angle
(Starboard)
Propeller Pitch angle
(Port)
Propeller rotational
speed (Starboard)
Propeller rotational
speed (Port)
Unit
Display format
Updating Standard input

cycle
system
deg.
deg.
deg.
deg.
/min
deg.
deg.
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
xxx.x
[P/S] xxx.x/min
xx.x
xx.x
10 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
10 sec
10 sec
ECDIS
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
ECDIS
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
hPa
xxxxhPa
10 sec
exterior sensor
%
kn
kn
kn
100%
[P/S] xx.xkn
[AH/AS] xx.xkn
[P/S] xx.xkn
10 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
deg. [P/S] xx.x
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
deg. [P/S] xx.x

deg./% [P/S] xx/%
1 sec
1 sec
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Thruster
deg./% [P/S] xx/%
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
deg./% [P/S] xx/%
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
deg./% [P/S] xx/%
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
RPM
[AH/AS] xxxRPM
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
RPM
[AH/AS] xxxRPM
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
KW
xxKW
1 sec
exterior sensor
Thruster
KW
xxKW
1 sec
exterior sensor
xx.xkn
xx.xkn
xx.xkn
[P/S] xx.x
10 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
ECDIS
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Planned Speed kn
STW
kn
Speed
kn
deg.
Propeller Pitch
deg. [P/S] xx.x

deg. [AH/AS] xx.x
1 sec
1 sec
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Propeller Pitch
deg. [AH/AS] xx.x
1 sec
exterior sensor
Propeller RPM
RPM
[AH/AS] xxxRPM
1 sec
exterior sensor
Propeller RPM
RPM
[AH/AS] xxxRPM
1 sec
exterior sensor
12-11
Conning Display
Block
Mode
Current
True
Wind Block
Item
True set and drift
Display name
Depth Graph
Block
Gyro Ruder
Graph Block
Draft Block
Current
Block
Standard input
system
deg.
16
1 sec
Drift
Drift
kn
xx.xkn
1 sec
deg.
m/sec,kn
deg.
16 cardinal points
xx.xm/sec, xx.xkn
360
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
kn
xx.xkn
1 sec
deg.
m/sec,kn
RPM
360
xx.xm/sec, xx.xkn
[AH/AS] xxxRPM
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Calculation from
exterior sensor
Calculation from
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Calculation from
exterior sensor
Calculation from
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Engine P
RPM
[AH/AS] xxxRPM
1 sec
exterior sensor
Depth
Xxxxm
1 sec
exterior sensor
Drift
Engine rotational
speed (Starboard)
Engine rotational
speed (Port)
Depth
Updating
cycle
Set
Wind direction Direction

Wind speed
Speed
Relative Relative set and drift Set
Set
Engine
Graph Block
Display format
Set
True Wind speed
Relative wind speed
Unit
Drift
Wind direction Direction

Wind speed
Speed
Engine S
Rudder
angle(Starboard)
Rudder angle (Port)
Gyro course
Fore
Rudder S
deg.
[P/S] xx.x
1 sec
exterior sensor
Rudder P
Gyro
Fore
deg.
deg.
M
[P/S] xx.x
xxx.x
xx.xm
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
exterior sensor
Mid(port)
Mid
xx.xm
1 sec
exterior sensor
Mid(starboard)
Mid
xx.xm
1 sec
exterior sensor
Aft
Aft
xx.xm
1 sec
exterior sensor
A layer
Xxxxm, xx.xkn, [P/S] xx.x 1 sec
exterior sensor
B layer
exterior sensor
C layer
m.kn,
deg.
m.kn,
deg.
m.kn,
deg.
exterior sensor
12-12
13
After-Sales
Service
13-1
13.1 Maintenance Service

Your equipment is guaranteed for one year after it is delivered to you.
13.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts

The replacement parts for repairing this equipment (parts essential to keeping the functional integrity of
this equipment) will be retained for ten years after its production is discontinued.
13.3 When Asking for Service

When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.6 Troubleshooting, and check again. If
the problem still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales
department or subsidiary for advice.
In that case, use the Repair Request Form at the end of this manual.
Repair during warranty period

Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and
instructions in the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge.
However, breakdowns
resulting from abuse, negligence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.
Repair after warranty period

Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the
client.
Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number
13.4 Checks and Inspection

Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although
the rate of this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on
inspection, contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.
When you may not understand about after sales service, ask your dealer or our nearby sales department.
11 After-Sales Service
13-2
14
Disposal
14-1
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes

on their
and
terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
14.1 Disposal of the Product

Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
14.2 Disposal of Used Batteries

Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the
terminals with tape before
disposal. In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium
cells in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.
14.3 Disposal of LCD Module

The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you
need to observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your
skin, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes.
If you find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the
liquid gets in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more
than 15 minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
12 Disposal
14-2
15
Specifications
15-1
15.1 Bridge Display Terminal

(1) Display
19 inch color LCD (JAN-701B)

23.1 inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (JAN-701B)
Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (JAN-901B)
(2) Operation panel
Keys and switches

Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick
(3) Processor
CPU mother board

Video board
Level interface board
8-channel serial interface A/B board
Gyro/log interface (NSK) board
Radar overlay board
Radar interface board
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
Silicon disk
Hard disk (Two-set component of main and sub)
CD-ROM drive
Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)
(4) Environmental conditions
IEC60945 Ver4.0 compliant
(5) Power voltage
Voltage : AC100V to 115V/AC200V to 230V (10%)

Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz (5%)
(6) Power consumption
330VA or less (JAN-701B)

350VA or less (JAN-901B)
13 Specifications
15-2
Index
Abbreviation for Geodetic System 9-16, 9-17

Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.... 3-183
Adjust Radar Bearing, Range and Antenna
Height ................................................. 7-23
Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)............. 3-81
Adjusting the Brightness and Sound
Volume ................................................ 3-24
Alarm Fuction.......................................... 9-2
Alarm Information of ARCS Chart ......... 9-7
Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart
.............................................................. 9-9
Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart . 9-10
ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)
............................................................ 3-74
Association Setting .............................. 3-194
Automatic Sailing Operation .................. 6-7
Automatic Sailing System....................... 6-2
Beam Line............................................ 3-160

Bearing Setting........................................ 7-8
Bridge Display Terminal ....................... 15-2
Button Functions..................................... 5-8
Distance Measurement ......................... 3-91

Canceling the Ship Offset ................... 3-199
Change of Course (Turning) ............. 6-2, 6-3
Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) .. 3-77
Changing the Display Color .................. 3-28
Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP
Only) ................................................... 3-64
Chart Abbreviations ............................ 3-182
Chart Edit Mode ...................................... 5-3
Chart Editing Menu ................................ 5-4
Chart-Related Alarm Information .......... 9-7
Checks and Inspection........................... 13-2
Clear Voyage Distance........................... 7-14
Code Input ............................................. 7-18
Color and Brilliance Setting...................7-11
Color Pattern (S-57)............................... 10-5
Color Test (ARCS Only)........................... 7-6
Components ............................................. 1-5
Configuration for Each Graph ...............11-4
Confirming Alarm.................................. 10-3
Line Monitor .......................................... 7-22
Construction ............................................ 1-6
Creating a New User Chart ...................5-11
Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and
Dials...................................................... 4-54
Creating Alternate Route ...................... 4-58
Creating an Alternate Route................. 4-57
Cross Bearing....................................... 3-127

Cursor Auto Mode ................................ 3-143
Daily Maintenance................................. 10-4

Danger Detection Vector and Sector ... 3-157
Data Backup/Restore ............................. 7-28
Data Formats of Files that ECDIS ....... 9-22
Date Data Source Setting ........................ 7-9
Display of Navigation Information ....... 12-2
Display Panel ........................................... 2-7
Auto Sailing Status................................ 2-12
Brilliance Setting Panel ........................ 2-18
CHART Information for ARCS .............. 2-16
CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP ... 2-15
Displaying a User Map .......................... 3-95
Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice
............................................................. 3-80
Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position
............................................................. 3-59
Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
..............................................................3-79
Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])
............................................................. 3-37
Displaying the Startup Menu.............. 3-201
Disposal of LCD Module ........................ 14-2
Disposal of the Product.......................... 14-2
Disposal of Used Batteries .................... 14-2
EBL Manager....................................... 3-125

Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
..............................................................4-51
Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
............................................................. 4-28
Editing a User Chart ...........5-14, 5-18, 5-23
Entering Objects .................................... 5-27
Entering/Exiting the Playback................ 8-2
Exporting Route Files....................4-30, 4-53
Features ................................................... 1-4

File Manager ............................................ 7-2
Flowchart (Alternate Route) ................. 4-57
Flowchart (For Sailing).......................... 3-18
Flowchart (General)............................... 3-17
Flowchart (Graphic Editor) ................................4-37
Flowchart (Manual Update) .................. 5-19
Flowchart (Table Editor) ....................... 4-14
Flowchart (User Chart) ........................... 5-9
Function ................................................... 1-2
Function of Operation Panel ................... 2-2
Function of the Screen (ECDIS).............. 2-5

Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic
Editor)...................................................... 4-33
Graphic Editing Mode ........................... 4-32
Graphical Index ................................... 3-185
Gray Scale.............................................. 10-6
Heading Line ...................................... 3-160

Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual
Update Operation) ............................. 5-40
Highlight .............................................. 3-123
How to Enter Numbers and Letters ..... 3-12
How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])
............................................................ 3-30
How to Select the Menu .......................... 3-3
Importing Route Files ................... 4-29, 4-52

Importing User Charts.......................... 5-17
Inputting Clearing Lines..................... 3-129
Installation Information........................ 7-25
Language ............................................... 7-17

Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)
.............................................................3-78
Logbook ................................................ 3-145
LOP(Line Of Position) ......................... 3-130
Maintenance Service ............................. 13-2

Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)
............................................................ 4-39
Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
............................................................ 4-16
Marking the Event Mark (EVENT) .....3-119
Marking the Information Mark .......... 3-121
Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ........ 3-122
Menu Operation....................................... 3-3
Menu Title Bar ...................................... 2-19
Merging User Charts............................. 5-16
Monitoring Dragging Anchor ...............3-117
Multi View Screen ................................. 3-86
My Port List ........................................... 3-71
Names and Functions.............................. 2-3
Operating EBL/VRM ........................... 3-101

MOB (Man OverBoard) ......................... 3-53
Operating Time........................................ 7-5
Operation when Editing User Charts....5-11
Operation when Manually Updating
Objects ................................................ 5-20
Own Ship Information ............................. 2-8

Own ships Parameter......................... 7-20
Own Ships Setting ([Ship] - [Option])........... 3-154
Playing Back the Logging Data............... 8-6

Power OFF Operation............................ 3-24
Power ON ............................................... 3-20
Primary Position and Secondary Position
............................................................... 7-7
CCRP Setting ......................................... 7-21
Ships Parameter................................. 7-20
Printing Display................................... 3-200
Radar Initial Setup ................................ 7-27

Radar Process Setting ........................... 7-17
Reading Out Information on the Object ........... 3-96
Replacing Consumables......................... 10-6
Retention Period of Repair Parts .......... 13-2
Route Monitoring and System Alarm ..... 6-4
Route Planning ........................................ 4-2
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
............................................................. 4-32
Route Planning Using the Table Editor.. 4-8
Running Fix ......................................... 3-116
Saving the Screen ................................ 3-200

Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only) ....... 3-73
Selecting an Area ................................... 3-87
Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP
Only).................................................... 3-69
Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).. 3-76
Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)
............................................................. 3-75
Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)
............................................................. 3-74
Selecting Motion Mode .......................... 3-69
Selecting Multi Window......................... 11-2
Selecting Object Types........................... 5-26
Selecting Route and To WPT ................. 3-89
Selecting Route and To WPT Using the
Display Panel...................................... 3-89
Selecting the Route and the WP.............. 6-8
Selecting the Startup Menu .................. 3-21
Sensor ....................................................... 7-7
Setting AIS/TT Options ....................... 3-189
Setting Chart Fix Mode ......................... 3-70
Setting Date/Time......................... 7-13, 7-14
Setting Radar Options ......................... 3-188
Setting the Alarm Options..................... 7-15
Setting the Automatic Sailing ................. 6-5
Setting the Chart Options ................... 3-161
Setting the Route Options ....................... 4-4
Setting the User Key ............................. 7-12
Shifting Own Ship Position ................. 3-196
Shifting the Chart.................................. 3-56
Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button

............................................................ 3-56
Shifting the Chart with the [Port List] Button
............................................................. 3-58
Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor
............................................................ 3-57
Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor
............................................................ 3-58
Own Ship Symbol ................................ 3-155
Speed Setting ........................................... 7-9
Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS
Only) ..................................................... 3-22
Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
............................................................ 3-62
Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
............................................................ 3-63
System Configuration............................ 1-12
System Information................................. 7-4
Table Editing Menu and Button Functions......... 4-9

Table Editing Mode ................................. 4-8
TCS Maintenance .................................. 7-26
Terminating the Automatic Sailing ......6-11,
6-12
The other information on the own ship 2-13
The Other Ship Displaying Status ....... 2-10
The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply
Input ................................................... 10-7
The setting of the route ......................... 2-12
Time Zone Data Source Setting ............ 7-10
To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS
Only).....................................................3-78
Tools Panel ............................................. 2-17
Track and Time Label Display ............ 3-159
Troubleshooting......................... 10-15, 10-18

File operation ......................................... 3-49
Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets
............................................................. 3-50
AIS sentence........................................... 3-50
Display Received Message..................... 3-50
Panel Display of AIS/TT Target ............ 3-52
Target Track ........................................... 3-46
AIS/TT display ON/OFF ........................ 3-40
The AIS/TT target Display .................... 3-40
Opening the AIS/TT list......................... 3-41
Use XTD Alarm ...................................... 3-94

Using the Analog Meter............ 3-140, 3-141
Acquisition Zone .................................. 3-138
Multi Window....................................... 3-140
Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk
Drive.................................................... 3-55
Various Panels ....................................... 3-10

Vector Display at POSN1 .................... 3-156
When Asking for Service........................ 13-2

Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only).. 3-88
Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band

(S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................. 3-60
Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..... 3-61
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement (EULA) is a
legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Japan
Radio Co., Ltd. (JRC) for the JRC ECDIS equipment that includes Microsoft
software products.
You have acquired a device (DEVICE) that includes software licensed by JRC from Microsoft
Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (MS). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and online or electronic documentation (SOFTWARE) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN
OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT.
JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all
faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCUARACY,
AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE
DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java
technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as
online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct
life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead
directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems,
Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS
OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the
recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the
SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Repair Request Form

Date :
To:
Mr/Ms
Reading
Point of
Contact
Repair
Requested by
TEL
FAX
Address
Ship's Name
Port Name
Product Name
Product No.
Symptom: (in as much detail as possible)

Date of Malfunction:
Desired Repair
Method
Malfunction Location:
Repair On Site/
Repair at JRC Office
Desired
Repair Date
(yyyy.mm.dd)
. . .
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements

of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements
(Type): JAN-701B
(Name): ECDIS
(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name)
(Inboard Unit)
(Display Unit)
(Inboard Unit)
(Keyboard Unit)
(Inboard Unit)
(Processing Unit)
(Peripherals)
(Options)
(Cables)
(Documennts)
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(Cr6+)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
SJ/T11306-2006
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
SJ/T11363-2006
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
JRC Code No. :
7ZPNA4056D
RE:
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China
1/1
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements

of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements
(Type): JAN-901B
(Name): ECDIS
(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name)
(Inboard Unit)
(Display Unit)
(Inboard Unit)
(Keyboard Unit)
(Inboard Unit)
(Processing Unit)
(Peripherals)
(Options)
(Cables)
(Documennts)
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(Cr6+)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
SJ/T11306-2006
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
SJ/T11363-2006
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
JRC Code No. :
7ZPNA4056D
RE:
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China
1/1
JAN-701B/901B
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL
http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department

Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420
Facsimile :
tmsc@jrc.co.jp
e-mail :
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile :
+31-20-658-0755
e-mail :
service@jrceurope.com
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile :
+1-206-654-7030
e-mail :
marineservice@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056D
01ETM
OCT. 2012 Edition 6
ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JRC
Printed in Japan

JAN-701B-901B Instruction Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAN-701B-901B Instruction Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAN-701B/901B

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

Marine Service Department

DEC. 2012 Edition 6

ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified

Cautions for High Voltage

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Method of First-Aid Treatment

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

Examples of pictorial indication

mark represents prohibition.

Detailed content of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in

Precautions Upon Equipment Operation

Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

Stand-alone type (JAN-901B)

: Automatic Identification System

: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

: Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

: The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as

: Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,

: Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.

: C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

: Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

: Course to steer. Heading command.

: Course Over the Ground

: Organization providing S-63 chart.

: Screen displayed on the LCD.

: Electronic Bearing Lines

: Electronic Chart Display and Information System

: Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

: Estimated Time of Arrival

: Estimated Time of Departure

: Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

: A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on

: Line between two consecutive waypoints

: Local Mean Time

: Main positioning sensor.

: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.

: Border that indicates the selected range.

: IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

: IHO Data Protection Scheme

: The display scale.

: System Electronic Navigational Chart

: To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,

: Speed Over the Ground

: Numeric representation of depth.

: Track Control Systems

: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

Update (for Chart Portfolio)

: A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the

: A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63